nv4

AIM VARIABLE
INSURANCE FUNDS

INVESTMENT GOAL

THE PORTFOLIO’S
MAIN INVESTMENTS

MANAGER

AIM V.I. PowerShares
ETF Allocation
Fund Series II

Provide total return consistent with a moderate level of risk relative to the broad stock market.

Principally invests in exchange traded funds (ETFs) with the expectation to invest, normally, at least 80% of its assets in portfolios of underlying PowerShares ETFs. The fund’s target allocation is to invest approximately 40% to 70% in underlying funds that invest primarily in equity securities and 30% to 60% in underlying funds that invest primarily in fixed income securities.

Invesco Aim Advisors, Inc.

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on July 24, 2009.
Registration Nos.

700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, California 92660
(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Offices) (Zip Code)

Brandon J. Cage
Assistant Vice President
Pacific Life Insurance Company
700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, California 92660
(Name and address of agent for service)

Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: As soon as practicable after the effective date of the Registration Statement. The Registrant hereby agrees to amend this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall therefore become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

It is proposed that this filing will become effective (check appropriate box)
o immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485

Title of Securities Being Registered: Interests in the Separate Account under Pacific Destinations individual flexible premium variable annuity contracts.


PART A
Item No.		Prospectus Heading
1.	Cover Page	Cover Page

2.	Definitions	TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS

3.	Synopsis	AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS

4.	Condensed Financial Information	FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Financial Statements

5.	General Description of Registrant, Depositor and Portfolio Companies	AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS; PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT — Pacific Life, — Separate Account A; YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS — Your Variable Investment Options; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Voting Rights


6.	Deductions	AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS; FEE TABLE; CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS; WITHDRAWALS — Optional Withdrawals; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Distribution Arrangements



7.	General Description of Variable Annuity Contracts	AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS; PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT — How to Apply for your Contract; HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED; ANNUITIZATION — Choosing Your Annuity Option, — Your Annuity Payments; DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS — Death Benefits; OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Voting Rights, — Changes to Your Contract, — Changes to ALL Contracts, — Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests, — Timing of Payments and Transactions, — Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities


8.	Annuity Period	ANNUITIZATION

9.	Death Benefit	DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS


10.	Purchases and Contract Value	AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS; PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT; HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED; PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT — Pacific Life; THE GENERAL ACCOUNT — Withdrawals and Transfers


11.	Redemptions	AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS; CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS; WITHDRAWALS; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Timing of Payments and Transactions; THE GENERAL ACCOUNT — Withdrawals and Transfers

12.	Taxes	CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS — Premium Taxes; WITHDRAWALS — Optional Withdrawals, — Tax Consequences of Withdrawals; FEDERAL TAX ISSUES

13.	Legal Proceedings	Not Applicable

14.	Table of Contents of the Statement of Additional Information	CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Information required to be included in Part C is set forth under the appropriate Item, so numbered, in Part C to this Registration Statement.


PACIFIC DESTINATIONS		PROSPECTUS [ ]

Pacific Destinations is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life).

This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. It’s accompanied by current Prospectuses for the Funds that provide the underlying Portfolios for the Variable Investment Options offered under the Contract. The Variable Investment Options are funded by Separate Account A of Pacific Life. Please read both Prospectuses carefully, and keep them for future reference.

Here’s a list of all the Investment Options currently available under your Contract; the Variable Investment Options are listed according to the underlying Funds:

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Pacific Select Fund


Small-Cap Growth International Value Long/Short Large-Cap* International Small-Cap Mid-Cap Value Equity Index Small-Cap Index Diversified Research American Funds^® Asset Allocation		American Funds^® Growth-Income American Funds^® Growth Large-Cap Value Short Duration Bond Floating Rate Loan* Growth LT Focused 30 Mid-Cap Equity International Large-Cap		Small-Cap Value Main Street^® Core Emerging Markets Money Market High Yield Bond Managed Bond Inflation Managed Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth		Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth Pacific Dynamix – Growth Large-Cap Growth Comstock Mid-Cap Growth Real Estate Small-Cap Equity Diversified Bond


*		This portfolio is only available through a Portfolio Optimization Model and is not available for individual investment.


AIM Variable Insurance Funds AIM V.I. PowerShares ETF Allocation Fund Series II	AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio Class B	BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund Class III

Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund Class 4	GE Investments Funds, Inc. GE Investments Total Return Fund Class 3	Van Kampen Life Investment Trust Van Kampen LIT Global Tactical Asset Allocation Portfolio Class II


FIXED OPTION DCA Plus Fixed Option

You’ll find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the SAI dated [ ]. The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You’ll find a table of contents for the SAI on page 61 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life or you can visit our website at www.pacificlife.com. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we are not legally permitted to offer the Contract.

The Contract is described in detail in this Prospectus and its Statement of Additional Information (SAI). A Fund is described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to describe the Contract or a Fund any differently than they have been described in these documents.

You should be aware that the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not reviewed the Contract and does not guarantee that the information in this Prospectus is accurate or complete. It’s a criminal offense to say otherwise.

This material is not intended to be used, nor can it be used by any taxpayer, for the purpose of avoiding U.S. federal, state or local tax penalties. Pacific Life, its distributors and their respective representatives do not provide tax, accounting or legal advice. Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.

This Contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Federal Reserve Board, or any other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk, including possible loss of principal.

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS

This overview tells you some key things you should know about your Contract. It’s designed as a summary only – please read this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) for more detailed information.

Certain Contract features described in this Prospectus may vary or may not be available in your state. The state in which your Contract is issued governs whether or not certain features, Riders, charges or fees are allowed or will vary under your Contract. These variations are reflected in your Contract and in Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. The terms of your Contract and of any Rider or Endorsement prevail over what is in this Prospectus. See your Registered Representative or contact us for specific information that may be applicable to your state.

In this Prospectus, you and your mean the Contract Owner or Policyholder. Pacific Life, we, us and our refer to Pacific Life Insurance Company. Contract means a Pacific Destinations variable annuity contract, unless we state otherwise.

Some of the Terms used in this Prospectus may be new to you. You will find a glossary of certain terms in the TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS section.

Pacific Destinations Basics

An annuity contract may be appropriate if you are looking for retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial objectives. Discuss with your qualified investment professional whether a variable annuity, optional benefits and underlying Investment Options are appropriate for you, taking into consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information. Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for you.

This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to withdraw money for short-term needs, because tax penalties for early withdrawal may apply.

You should consider the Contract’s investment and income benefits, as well as its costs.

Pacific Destinations is an annuity contract between you and Pacific Life Insurance Company. Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase and the annuitization (income) phase. The two phases are discussed below.

This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for retirement or other goals, and/or to receive income in a variety of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a specified period of years.

Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a Non-Qualified Contract with “after-tax” dollars. You buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension plan, or some form of an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA). It’s important to know that IRAs and qualified plans are already tax-deferred which means the tax deferral feature of a variable annuity does not provide a benefit in addition to that already offered by an IRA or qualified plan. An annuity contract should only be used to fund an IRA or qualified plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral.

Pacific Destinations is a variable annuity, which means that the value of your Contract fluctuates depending on the performance of the Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”) and how much you add each time.

Your Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your registered representative for a refund. The amount refunded may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made, depending on the state where you signed your application and the type of Contract you buy.

You will find more information about the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) period starting on page 33.

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS

The Accumulation Phase

The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will affect the value of your Contract during the accumulation phase, as well as the amount available to annuitize on the Annuity Date.

The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Purchase Payments, and choose Investment Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out of your Contract by making a withdrawal.

Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $5,000 for a Non-Qualified Contract and at least $2,000 for a Qualified Contract. Additional Purchase Payments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract.

You will find more information about Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”) starting on page 15.

Investment Options

You can ask your registered representative to help you choose the right Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance. Any financial firm or registered representative you engage to provide advice and/or make transfers for you is not acting on our behalf. We are not responsible for any investment decisions or allocations you make, recommendations such financial representatives make or any allocations or specific transfers they choose to make on your behalf.

You can choose from a variety of Variable Investment Options (also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a corresponding Portfolio of a Fund. The value of each Portfolio will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and returns are not guaranteed.

You can also choose any available fixed option that earns a guaranteed rate of interest of at least 3% annually.

We allocate your Net Purchase Payments to the Investment Options you choose. The value of your Contract will fluctuate during the accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you have chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment Options you choose.

You will find more information about the Investment Options and the Investment Advisers starting on page 11.

Transferring Among Investment Options

You can transfer among Investment Options any time, subject to certain limitations, until your Annuity Date without paying any current income tax. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only 2 transfers per month may involve the AIM V.I. PowerShares ETF Allocation Fund, BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund, GE Investments Total Return Fund, International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap, Emerging Markets, or Van Kampen LIT Global Tactical Asset Allocation Investment Options. In addition, only 2 transfers into or out of the American Funds Asset Allocation, American Funds Growth or American Funds Growth-Income Investment Options may occur in any calendar month. If you have used all 25 transfers in a calendar year, you may make one additional transfer of all or a portion of your Variable Account Value to the Money Market Investment Option before the start of the next calendar year. You can also make systematic transfers by enrolling in our dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing or earnings sweep programs. Transfers made under these systematic transfer programs or transfers made by us to update a Portfolio Optimization Model are excluded from the limitation. Some restrictions may apply to transfers to or from any fixed option.

You will find more information about transfers and transfer limitations starting on page 21.

Withdrawals

You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your income or for other purposes. There is no withdrawal charge. Some restrictions apply to making partial withdrawals from any fixed option.

In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or other distributions from your Contract. If you’re under age 591/2, a 10% federal tax penalty may also apply to taxable withdrawals.

You will find more information about withdrawals starting on page 32.

The Income Phase

The income phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date. Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive a series of income payments over a fixed period or for life.

You can choose fixed or variable annuity payments, or a combination of both. Variable annuity payments may not be available in all states. You can choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual payments. We will make the income payments to you or your designated payee. The Owner is responsible for any tax consequences of any annuity payments.

If you choose variable annuity payments, the amount of the payments will fluctuate depending on the performance of the Variable Investment Options you choose. After your Annuity Date, if you choose variable annuity payments, you can exchange your Subaccount Annuity Units among the Variable Investment Options up to 4 times in any 12-month period.

You will find more information about annuitization starting on page 25 and annuity options available under the Contract starting on page 27.

The Death Benefit

Generally, the Contract provides a death benefit upon the first death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and payment instructions in proper form. To whom we pay a death benefit, and how we calculate the amount of the death benefit depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own.

You will find more information about the death benefit starting on page 28.

Optional Riders

Optional Riders are subject to availability (including state availability). Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with a qualified investment professional for advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. We reserve the right to restrict the purchase of an optional living benefit Rider to only Contract issue in the future.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)

This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s 81^st birthday) adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals. You can only buy the SDBR when you buy your Contract.

You will find more information about the SDBR starting on page 31.

Optional Living Benefit Riders

You may purchase an optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary (if available). In addition, if you purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or, if available, within 60 days after any Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must invest your entire Contract Value in an asset allocation program or in Investment Options we make available for these Riders. The allocation limitations associated with these Riders may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. See OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – General Information – Investment Allocation Requirements.

Some optional riders allow for owner elected Resets/Step-Ups. If you elect to Reset/Step-Up, your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary (“60 day period”) on which the Reset/Step-Up is effective. We may, at our sole discretion, allow Resets/Step-Ups after the 60 day period. We reserve the right to refuse a Reset/Step-Up request after the 60 day period regardless of whether we may have allowed you or others to Reset/Step-Up in the past. Each Contract Anniversary starts a new 60 day period in which a Reset/Step-Up may be elected.

There may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional Rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Automatic Income Builder Rider

This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw up to 4%, 5%, or 6% (depending on your age) of your Protected Payment Base per year, lock in market gains, and provides the potential to withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount for life, if certain conditions are met. If you are older than 591/2 and if you delay taking withdrawals, this Rider also provides the potential to receive a 0.10% increase in the withdrawal percentage per year, which can increase the percentage that you may withdraw each Contract Year without reducing your Protected Payment Base. Once a withdrawal is taken, regardless of your age when the withdrawal occurred, the 0.10% increase in the withdrawal percentage will no longer be applied. Any previously added 0.10% increase in the withdrawal percentage will be locked in and will remain a part of your total withdrawal percentage. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the

Fees and Expenses

This section of the overview explains the fees and expenses associated with your Pacific Destinations Contract.

Contract Transaction Expenses

The following describes the transaction fees and expenses that you will pay when owning your Contract. Expenses are fixed under the terms of your Contract. Premium taxes and/or other taxes may also apply to your Contract. We generally charge state premium taxes and/or other taxes when you annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract for details.

Sales Charge¹ (as a percentage of Purchase Payment):


Cumulative Value	Sales Charge

Less than $50,000		5.5%
$50,000 - $99,999		4.5%
$100,000 - $249,999		3.5%
$250,000 - $499,999		2.5%
$500,000 - $999,999		2.0%
$1,000,000 or greater		0.5%

Periodic Expenses

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time you own your Contract not including Portfolio fees and expenses.


• Annual Fee²						$	30.00

Separate Account A Annual Expenses (as a percentage of the average daily Account Value³) (See TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS on page 59):


	Without		With Stepped-Up
	Rider		Death Benefit Rider

• Mortality and Expense Risk Charge⁴		0.60%		0.60%
• Administrative Fee⁴		0.15%		0.15%
• Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider Charge^4,5		none		0.20%

• Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses		0.75%		0.95%


Loan Expenses (interest on Contract Debt) (Loans are only available with certain Qualified Contracts. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES—Qualified Contracts—General Rules—Loans on page 48):

• Loan Interest Rate (net)⁶				2.00%

Optional Rider Annual Expenses:


	Current Charge		Maximum Charge
	Percentage		Percentage

• Automatic Income Builder Rider Charge⁷		0.95%		1.50%


¹		A sales charge will be deducted from all Purchase Payments. For more information on the sales charge percentage that will be applied to a Purchase Payment, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Sales Charge.

²		We deduct an Annual Fee on each Contract Anniversary up to your Annuity Date and when you make a full withdrawal if the Contract Value on these days is less than $50,000 after deducting any outstanding loan and interest (your Net Contract Value). See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.

³		The Variable Account Value represents the value of your Variable Investment Options on any Business Day. The Contract Value represents the value of your Variable Investment Options, any fixed Investment Options plus any Loan Account Value on any Business Day.

⁴		This is an annual rate and is assessed on a daily basis. The daily rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.

⁵		If you buy the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider we add this charge to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge until your Annuity Date.

⁶		If we process a loan on your Contract, we will charge you a gross interest rate of 5.00% on your outstanding principal amount. We will credit you the amount of 3.00% on any Contract Value attributed to your Loan Account. The net amount of interest you pay on your loan will be 2.00% annually. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES—Qualified Contracts—General Rules—Loans.

⁷		If you buy the Automatic Income Builder Rider, the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base is the amount used to determine the allowable annual withdrawal amount under the Rider. The initial Protected

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS


		Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – Automatic Income Builder Rider. The amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may increase to the current charge percentage if an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract or after the Contract Value is zero. The annual charge is only waived for the current Contract Year, even if death occurs in a prior Contract Year.

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses

You will find more about the underlying Funds starting on page 11, and in each underlying Fund Prospectus which accompanies this Prospectus.

This table shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses paid by the Portfolios that you indirectly pay during the time you own the Contract. This table shows the range (minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses (including management fees, shareholder servicing and/or distribution (12b-1) fees, and other expenses) charged by any of the Portfolios, expressed as an annual percentage of average daily net assets. The amounts are based on expenses paid in the year ended December 31, 2008, adjusted to reflect anticipated changes in fees and expenses, or, for new Portfolios, are based on estimates for the current fiscal year.

Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares of the corresponding Fund Portfolio at net asset value. The net asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to year. These fees and expenses are described in each Fund Prospectus.


	Minimum		Maximum

Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses before any waivers or expense reimbursements		0.28%		2.37%
Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses after any waivers or expense reimbursements		0.28%		1.64%

To help limit Fund expenses, Fund advisers have contractually agreed to reduce investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse certain Portfolios of their respective Funds which may reduce the Portfolio’s expenses. The range of expenses in the first row above does not include the effect of any waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangement. The range of expenses in the second row above includes the effect of waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangements that will remain in effect at least through April 30, 2010. There can be no assurance that expense waivers or reimbursements will be extended beyond their current terms, and they may not cover certain expenses such as extraordinary expenses. See each Fund prospectus for complete information regarding annual operating expenses of that Fund.

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC DESTINATIONS

Examples

The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. The maximum amounts reflected below include the maximum periodic Contract expenses, Contract Transaction Expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the highest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2008. The maximum amounts also include the combination of optional Riders whose cumulative maximum charge expenses totaled more than any other optional Rider combination. The optional Riders included are the Stepped-Up Death Benefit and Automatic Income Builder Riders. The minimum amounts reflected below include the minimum periodic Contract expenses, Contract Transaction Expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the lowest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2008. The minimum amounts do not include any optional Riders.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Purchase Payment has a 5% return each year and assumes the maximum and minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would be:


•	If you surrendered, annuitized, or left your money in your Contract:


	1 Year	3 Years	5 Years	10 Years
Maximum*	$470	$1,412	$2,353	$4,711
Minimum*	$123	$382	$661	$1,459


*		In calculating the examples above, we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section of each Fund Prospectus. For more information on fees and expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this Prospectus, and see each Fund Prospectus. See the FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS section in this Prospectus for condensed financial information about the Subaccounts.

YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS

You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options and the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Your Variable Investment Options

Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Portfolio of a Fund. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio, including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see the applicable Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ EACH FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.



PACIFIC SELECT FUND	INVESTMENT GOAL	THE PORTFOLIO’S MAIN INVESTMENTS	MANAGER

Small-Cap Growth	Capital appreciation.	Equity securities of small, fast growing companies.	Fred Alger Management, Inc.

International Value	Long-term capital appreciation.	Equity securities of relatively large non-U.S. companies believed to be undervalued.	AllianceBernstein L.P.

Long/Short Large-Cap*	Above-average total returns.	Equity securities of large-capitalization companies including both long and short positions.	Analytic Investors, LLC & J.P. Morgan Investment Management, Inc.

International Small-Cap	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of non-U.S. companies with small market capitalizations.	Batterymarch Financial Management, Inc.

Mid-Cap Value	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of mid-capitalization companies.	BlackRock Capital Management, Inc.

Equity Index	Investment results that correspond to the total return of common stocks publicly traded in the U.S.	Equity securities of companies that are included in or representative of the S&P 500 index^® (including derivatives).	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

Small-Cap Index	Investment results that correspond to the total return of an index of small-capitalization companies.	Equity securities of small companies that are included in or representative of the Russell 2000 Index (including derivatives).	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

Diversified Research	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of companies located in the U.S., or whose principal markets are in the U.S.	Capital Guardian Trust Company

American Funds Asset Allocation	High total returns (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long-term.	A master fund that invests in equity and fixed income securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies and in money market instruments.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Asset Allocation Fund)

American Funds Growth-Income	Long-term growth of capital and income.	A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size and other securities which demonstrate the potential for appreciation and/or dividends.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Growth- Income Fund)

American Funds Growth	Long-term growth of capital.	A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size that appear to offer superior opportunities for growth of capital.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Growth Fund)

Large-Cap Value	Long-term growth of capital. (Current income is of secondary importance.)	Equity securities of large U.S. companies.	ClearBridge Advisors, LLC

Short Duration Bond	Current income. (Capital appreciation is of secondary importance.)	High quality fixed income securities with an average portfolio duration not likely to exceed 3 years.	Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

Floating Rate Loan*	High level of current income.	Interests in floating rate senior loans.	Highland Capital Management, L.P.

Growth LT	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of companies of any size.	Janus Capital Management LLC

Focused 30	Long-term growth of capital.	U.S. and foreign equity securities selected for their growth potential.	Janus Capital Management LLC

Mid-Cap Equity	Capital appreciation.	Equity securities of medium-sized U.S. companies believed to be undervalued.	Lazard Asset Management LLC

International Large-Cap	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of companies with large market capitalizations located outside the U.S.	MFS Investment Management


*		This portfolio is only available through a Portfolio Optimization Model and is not available for individual investment.



PACIFIC SELECT FUND	INVESTMENT GOAL	THE PORTFOLIO’S MAIN INVESTMENTS	MANAGER

Small-Cap Value	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of small companies believed to be undervalued.	NFJ Investment Group LLC

Main Street Core	Long-term growth of capital and income.	Equity securities of companies of different capitalization ranges with a focus on large capitalization U.S. companies.	OppenheimerFunds, Inc.

Emerging Markets	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of companies that are located in countries generally regarded as “emerging market” countries.	OppenheimerFunds, Inc.

Money Market	Current income consistent with preservation of capital.	Highest quality money market instruments believed to have limited credit risk.	Pacific Asset Management

High Yield Bond	High level of current income.	Fixed income securities with lower and medium-quality credit ratings and intermediate to long terms to maturity.	Pacific Asset Management

Managed Bond	Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.	Medium and high-quality fixed income securities with varying terms to maturity and derivatives relating to such securities or related indexes.	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

Inflation Managed	Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.	Fixed income securities of varying maturities with a focus on inflation-indexed bonds and forward contracts and derivatives relating to such securities.	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth	Current income and moderate growth of capital.	Targets an equity/debt blend of 40/60 through investment in certain underlying portfolios of Pacific Select Fund.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth	Long-term growth of capital and low to moderate income.	Targets an equity/debt blend of 60/40 through investment in certain underlying portfolios of Pacific Select Fund.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Pacific Dynamix – Growth	Moderately high, long-term growth of capital with low, current income.	Targets an equity/debt blend of 80/20 through investment in certain underlying portfolios of Pacific Select Fund.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Large-Cap Growth	Long-term growth of capital. (Current income is of secondary importance.)	Equity securities of large companies with the potential for long-term growth of capital.	UBS Global Asset Management (Americas) Inc.

Comstock	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of companies believed to have the potential for long-term growth of capital and income.	Van Kampen

Mid-Cap Growth	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of medium-sized companies believed to have above-average growth potential.	Van Kampen

Real Estate	Current income and long-term capital appreciation.	Equity securities of companies principally engaged in the U.S. real estate industry, including REITs and REOCs.	Van Kampen

Small-Cap Equity	Long-term growth of capital.	Equity securities of small companies believed to be undervalued.	Vaughan Nelson Investment Management, L.P.

Diversified Bond	Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.	Fixed income securities of varying qualities and terms to maturity of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies and derivatives relating to such securities or related indexes.	Western Asset Management Company

The Investment Advisers

Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), a subsidiary of Pacific Life Insurance Company, is the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund. PLFA and the Pacific Select Fund’s Board of Trustees oversee the management of all the Pacific Select Fund’s portfolios, and PLFA also manages certain portfolios directly. PLFA also does business under the name “Pacific Asset Management” and manages the Pacific Select Fund’s Money Market and High Yield Bond portfolios under that name.

Invesco Aim Advisors, Inc. is the investment adviser for the AIM Variable Insurance Funds and has retained other affiliated sub-advisers to manage the portfolio. It is anticipated that, on or about the end of the fourth quarter of 2009, Invesco Aim, Invesco Global and Invesco Institutional will be combined into a single entity, which will be named Invesco Advisers, Inc. The combined entity will serve as the fund’s investment adviser. Invesco Advisers, Inc. will provide substantially the same services as are currently provided by the three existing separate entities. Further information about this combination will be posted on http://www.invescoaim.com on or about the closing date of the transaction.

AllianceBernstein L.P. is the investment adviser for the AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc.

BlackRock Advisors, LLC is the investment adviser for the BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. and has retained various sub-advisors for its portfolios.

Franklin Templeton Services, LLC is the fund administrator for the Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund of the Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust.

GE Asset Management Incorporated is the investment adviser for the GE Investments Funds, Inc.

Van Kampen Asset Management is the investment adviser for the Van Kampen Life Investment Trust.

Your Fixed Option

The DCA Plus Fixed Option offers you a guaranteed minimum interest rate on amounts that you allocate to this option. Amounts you allocate to this option, and your earnings credited are held in our General Account. For more detailed information about this option, see THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT

How to Apply for Your Contract

To purchase a Contract, you must work with your registered representative to fill out an application and submit it along with your initial Purchase Payment to Pacific Life Insurance Company at P.O. Box 2290, Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your registered representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If your application and Purchase Payment are complete when received, or once they have become complete, we will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some information is missing from your application, we may delay issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information. However, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment for more than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment after 20 Business Days.

You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing annuity. You must submit all contracts to be exchanged when you submit your application. Call your registered representative, or call us at 1-800-722-4448. Registered Representatives may call us at 1-800-722-2333.

We reserve the right to reject any application or Purchase Payment for any reason, subject to any applicable nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines. On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax identification number for federal and state tax reporting purposes.

The maximum age of a Contract Owner/Annuitant, including Joint Owners/Annuitants and Contingent Annuitants, for which a Contract will be issued is 85. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies and we are notified of the death before we issue the Contract, then we will return the amount we received. If we are not notified of the death and we issue the Contract, then the application for the Contract and/or any Contract issued will be deemed cancelled and a refund will be issued. The amount of the refund may be more or less than the initial Purchase Payment received, or any other Purchase Payment we received in connection with an exchange or transfer. The refund will be the Contract Value based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive proof of death, in proper form, of the Contract Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amounts that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges or used to pay premium taxes and/or any other taxes. Any refund may subject the refunded assets to probate.

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Making Your Initial Purchase Payment

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $5,000 if you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract, and at least $2,000 if you are buying a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts in the future. For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial Purchase Payment is not included when you submit your application, you must submit a portion of the required Contract minimum and/or establish a pre-authorized checking plan (PAC). A PAC allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial Purchase Payment in equal installments over the first year. Further requirements for PAC are discussed in the PAC form.

You must obtain our consent before making an initial or additional Purchase Payment that will bring your aggregate Purchase Payments over $1,000,000.

Making Additional Purchase Payments

If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan or the Internal Revenue Code (“the Code”). Each additional Purchase Payment must be at least $250 for Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts in the future. Contracts issued in certain states may limit additional Purchase Payments.

If your Contract Value is below $1,000, there are no optional riders in effect, and no Purchase Payments have been received during the preceding 3 year period, we reserve the right to terminate your Contract and pay the Owner the Net Contract Value as a lump sum.

Forms of Purchase Payment

Your initial and additional Purchase Payments may be sent by personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Purchase Payments must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process it. Acceptable forms of Purchase Payments are:


	•	personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a U.S. bank,

	•	money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,

	•	third party payments when there is a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

	•	wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.

We will not accept Purchase Payments in the following forms:


	•	cash,

	•	credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,

	•	money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations of $10,000 or less,

	•	starter checks,

	•	cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,

	•	third party payments if there is not a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

	•	wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.

All unacceptable forms of Purchase Payments will be returned to the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. If you make Purchase Payments by check other than a cashier’s check, your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Choosing Your Investment Options

You may allocate your Net Purchase Payments among any of the available Investment Options. Allocations of your initial Net Purchase Payment to the Investment Options you selected will be effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Net Purchase Payment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”). We reserve the right to require that your allocation

to any particular Investment Option must be at least $500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered.

Portfolio Optimization

The Service. Portfolio Optimization is an asset allocation service that is offered at no additional charge for use within this variable annuity. Asset allocation refers to the manner that investments are distributed among asset classes to help attain an investment goal. For your variable annuity, Portfolio Optimization can help with decisions about how you should allocate your Contract Value among available Investment Options. The theory behind Portfolio Optimization is that diversification among asset classes can help reduce volatility over the long term.

As part of the Portfolio Optimization service, several asset allocation models have been developed (“Portfolio Optimization Models” or “Models”), each based on different profiles of an investor’s willingness to accept investment risk. If you decide to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service and select one of the Portfolio Optimization Models, your initial Net Purchase Payment (in the case of a new application) or Contract Value, as applicable, will be allocated to the Investment Options according to the Model you select. Subsequent Net Purchase Payments, if allowed under your Contract, will also be allocated accordingly, unless you instruct us otherwise. If you choose, you can rebalance your Contract Value quarterly, semi-annually, or annually, to the current allocations of your Portfolio Optimization Model, since changes in the net asset values of the underlying Portfolios within each Model will alter your asset allocation over time. If you also allocate part of your Net Purchase Payment or Contract Value to Investment Options that are not currently included in your Model and you elect periodic rebalancing, such amounts will not be considered when rebalancing. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization and elect periodic rebalancing, only the Investment Options within your Model will be rebalanced.

If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (Adviser), a subsidiary of Pacific Life, will serve as your investment adviser for the service solely for purposes of development of the Portfolio Optimization Models and periodic updates of the Models.

On a periodic basis (typically annually), the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated and the Models are updated, as discussed below. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, your Contract Value or subsequent Net Purchase Payments, as applicable, will automatically be reallocated in accordance with the Model you select, as it is updated from time to time, based on discretionary authority that you grant to the Adviser, unless you instruct otherwise. For more information on the role of the investment adviser for the Portfolio Optimization service, please see the brochure from the Adviser’s Form ADV, the SEC investment adviser registration form, which will be delivered to Contract Owners at the time they apply for a Contract. Please contact us if you would like to receive a copy of this brochure. In developing and periodically updating the Portfolio Optimization Models, the Adviser currently relies on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm. The Adviser may change the firm that it uses from time to time, or, to the extent permissible under applicable law, use no independent firm at all.

The Portfolio Optimization Models. Five asset allocation models are offered, each comprised of a carefully selected combination of Investment Options (reflecting the underlying Portfolios of Pacific Select Fund). Development of the Portfolio Optimization models is a multi-step process. First, an optimization analysis is performed to determine the breakdown of asset classes. Optimization analysis requires forecasting returns, standard deviations and correlation coefficients of asset classes over the desired investing horizon and an analysis using a state-of-the art program and a statistical analytical technique known as “mean-variance optimization”. Next, after the asset class exposures are known, a determination is made of how available Investment Options (underlying Portfolios) can be used to implement the asset class level allocations. The Investment Options are selected by evaluating the asset classes represented by the underlying Portfolios and combining Investment Options to arrive at the desired asset class exposures. The Portfolio-specific analysis uses historical returns-based style analysis and asset performance and regression and attribution analyses. It may also include portfolio manager interviews. Based on this analysis, Investment Options are selected in a way intended to optimize potential returns for each Model, given a particular level of risk tolerance. This process could, in some cases, result in the inclusion of an Investment Option in a Model based on its specific asset class exposure or other specific optimization factors, even where another Investment Option may have better historical performance.

Periodic Updates of the Portfolio Optimization Model and Notices of Updates. Each of the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated periodically (generally, annually) to assess whether the combination of Investment Options within each Model should be changed to better seek to optimize the potential return for the level of risk tolerance intended for the Model. As a result of the periodic analysis, each Model may change and Investment Options may be added to a Model (including Investment Options not currently available), or Investment Options may be deleted from a Model.

When your Portfolio Optimization Model is updated, your Contract Value (and subsequent Net Purchase Payments, if applicable) will automatically be reallocated in accordance with any changes to the Model you have selected. This means the allocation of your Contract Value, and potentially the Investment Options in which you are invested, will automatically change and your Contract Value (and subsequent Net Purchase Payments, if applicable) will automatically be reallocated among the Investment Options in your updated Model (independently of any automatic rebalancing you may have selected). The Adviser requires that you grant it discretionary investment

authority to periodically reallocate your Contract Value (and subsequent Net Purchase Payments, if applicable) in accordance with the updated version of the Portfolio Optimization Model you have selected, if you wish to participate in Portfolio Optimization.

When the Adviser updates the Portfolio Optimizations Models, a written notice of the updated Models will be sent to participants at least 30 days in advance of the date the Adviser intends the updated version of the Model to be effective. You should carefully review these notices. If you wish to accept the changes in your selected Model, you will not need to take any action, as your Contract Value (or subsequent Net Purchase Payments, if applicable) will automatically be reallocated in accordance with the updated Model. If you do not wish to accept the changes to your selected Model, you can change to a different Model or withdraw from the Portfolio Optimization service. Some of the optional riders available under your Contract have investment allocation requirements. If you purchased any of these riders, such riders may terminate if you do not allocate your Contract Value consistent with the investment allocation requirements. See OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – General Information – Investment Allocation Requirements.

Selecting a Portfolio Optimization Model. If you choose to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service, you need to determine which Portfolio Optimization Model is best for you. Neither the Adviser nor its affiliates will make this decision. You should consult with your registered representative on this decision. Your registered representative can help you determine which Model is best suited to your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. You should periodically review these factors with your registered representative to determine if you should change Models to keep up with changes in your personal circumstances. Your registered representative can assist you in completing the proper forms to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service or to change to a different Model. You may, in consultation with your registered representative, utilize analytical tools made available by the Adviser, including an investor profile questionnaire, which asks questions intended to help you or your registered representative assess your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. Your responses can be analyzed using the service available on our website. While the information from our website may assist you, it is your decision, in consultation with your registered representative, to select a Model or to change to a different Model, and the Adviser and its affiliates bear no responsibility for this decision. You may change to a different Model at any time, subject to transfer and market timing restrictions, with a proper written request or by telephone or electronic instructions provided a valid telephone/electronic authorization is on file with us.

Periodic Reports. Participants in the Portfolio Optimization service will periodically be sent performance information regarding the Investment Options within a selected Model. This information may also be accessed online. Information concerning the current Models is described below.

Risks. Although the Models are designed to optimize returns given the various levels of risk, there is no assurance that a Model portfolio will not lose money or that investment results will not experience volatility. Investment performance of your Contract Value could be better or worse by participating in a Portfolio Optimization Model than if you had not participated. A Model may perform better or worse than any single Investment Option or asset class or other combinations of Investment Options or asset classes. Model performance is dependent upon the performance of the component Investment Options (and their underlying Portfolios). The timing of your investment and the frequency of automatic rebalancing may affect performance. Your Contract Value will fluctuate, and when redeemed, may be worth more or less than the original cost.

A Portfolio Optimization Model may not perform as intended. Although the Models are intended to optimize returns given various levels of risk tolerance, portfolio, market and asset class performance may differ in the future from the historical performance and assumptions upon which the Models are based, which could cause the Models to be ineffective or less effective in reducing volatility.

Periodic updating of the Portfolio Optimization Models can cause the underlying Portfolios to incur transactional expenses to raise cash for money flowing out of the Portfolios or to buy securities with money flowing into the Portfolios. These expenses can adversely affect performance of the pertinent Portfolios and the Models.

The Adviser may be subject to competing interests that have the potential to influence its decision making with regard to Portfolio Optimization. For example, one Portfolio may provide a higher advisory fee to the Adviser than another Portfolio, and provide the Adviser with incentive to use the Portfolio with the higher fee as part of a Portfolio Optimization Model. In addition, the Adviser may believe that certain Portfolios may benefit from additional assets or could be harmed by redemptions. As adviser to Pacific Select Fund, the Adviser monitors the Portfolios, and may, from time to time, recommend to the Pacific Select Fund’s Board of Trustees a change in portfolio management firm or strategy or the closure or merger of a Portfolio, all of which could impact a Model. All Pacific Select Fund Portfolios available as Investment Options, except those expected to be liquidated or merged or that are asset allocation oriented by structure (i.e. the American Funds Asset Allocation Portfolio and the Pacific Dynamix Portfolios), are analyzed by the independent third party analytical firm. The third party analytical firm determines the number of Portfolios in a Model, the percent that any Portfolio represents in a Model, and which Portfolios may be selected. The Adviser will work with the analytical firm to resolve any investment related matters derived from the analytical firm’s recommendations. The Adviser believes that its reliance on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm to develop and update the Models (as described above) reduces or eliminates the potential for the Adviser to be influenced by these competing interests, but there can be no assurance of this.

The Adviser and its affiliates are under no contractual obligation to continue this service and have the right to terminate or change the Portfolio Optimization service at any time.

The Models. Information concerning the Portfolio Optimization Models is described below. These Models are available effective May 1, 2009. You should review this information carefully with your registered representative before selecting or changing a Model.

Model A

Model B

Model C

Model D

Model E

Conservative

Moderate-Conservative

Moderate

Moderate-Aggressive

Aggressive

Investor Profile

You are looking for a
relatively stable investment
and do not tolerate short-term market swings.

Your focus is on keeping pace with inflation and you can tolerate a moderate level of risk.

You want the opportunity for long-term moderate growth.

You want an investment that is geared for growth and are willing to accept above average risk.

You are an aggressive investor and can tolerate short-term market swings.

Shorter Investment Time Horizon◄———►Longer Investment Time Horizon

Investor Objective

Primarily preservation of capital

Moderate growth

Steady growth in asset values

Moderately high growth in asset values

High growth in asset values

Risk Characteristics

There may be some losses in the values of the investment as asset values fluctuate.

There may be some losses in the values of the investment from year to year.

There will probably be some losses in the values of the underlying investments from
year to year.

Fluctuations in value should be less than those of the overall stock markets.

Some of these might be large, but the overall fluctuations in asset values should be less than those of the U.S. stock market.

Lower Risk◄———►Higher Risk

Asset Class Target Exposure as of May 1, 2009


	Model A			Model B			Model C			Model D			Model E

Cash Equivalents		7	%		5	%		2	%		—			—

Fixed Income		73			55			38			20	%		5	%

Domestic Equity		15			30			44			58			67

International Equity		5			10			16			22			28


Portfolio Optimization Model Target Allocations as of May 1, 2009
	Model A			Model B			Model C			Model D			Model E

Small-Cap Growth		—			—			1	%		2	%		2	%

International Value		2	%		3	%		4			5			7

Long/Short Large-Cap		2			3			4			4			4

International Small-Cap		—			1			2			3			3

Equity Index		3			6			8			8			8

Small-Cap Index		—			—			—			—			2

Mid-Cap Value		—			2			3			3			3

Diversified Research		—			—			—			2			2

American Funds^® Growth-Income		—			—			3			5			5

American Funds^® Growth		—			1			2			2			3

Large-Cap Value		5			6			8			8			8

Short Duration Bond		11			8			3			2			—

Floating Rate Loan		8			6			3			—			—

Growth LT		—			2			3			3			4

Mid-Cap Equity		3			2			3			5			6

International Large-Cap		3			4			4			7			9

Small-Cap Value		—			1			1			2			2

Main Street^® Core		—			2			3			3			3

Emerging Markets		—			—			3			4			5

Managed Bond		21			16			11			5			3

Inflation Managed		18			14			11			8			—

High Yield Bond		5			4			3			—			—

Large-Cap Growth		1			3			3			3			4

Mid-Cap Growth		—			2			2			3			4

Comstock		2			3			5			6			6

Real Estate		—			—			—			2			3

Small-Cap Equity		—			—			1			3			4

Diversified Bond		16			11			6			2			—

	Less Volatile◄———►More Volatile

Custom Model

The Custom Model program allows you, with the help of your financial professional, to create your own asset allocation model that will comply with the Investment Allocation Requirements for certain optional living benefit Riders. (See OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – General Information – Investment Allocation Requirements.) You will create your own model using the parameters listed below.

Parameters. To create your model, you may select Investment Options from the 4 Categories (Categories A, B, C and D) listed below. You must allocate at least 25% into each of Categories A, B, and C. You may not allocate more than 15% into any one Investment Option within Category A, B, or C. Category D is optional and you are not required to allocate any part of your Net Purchase Payment or Contract Value to this Category. If you choose to allocate your Net Purchase Payment or Contract Value to Category D, you are allowed to allocate up to 25% into any one Investment Option within Category D. Allocation percentages among the Categories must total 100%. The model you create will be automatically rebalanced on a quarterly basis.

Example: Assume a $100,000 Net Purchase Payment. Following the parameters and using the Investment Options listed from the Categories below, you may allocate your Net Purchase Payment as follows:


	•	Category A – 15% to Diversified Bond, 10% to Managed Bond and 5% to Money Market,

	•	Category B – 15% to Focused 30, 10% to Small-Cap Index, 10% to Mid-Cap Growth, 5% to Large-Cap Growth and 5% to Large-Cap Value, and

	•	Category C – 10% to International Value, 10% to International Large-Cap and 5% to Emerging Markets.

The total allocated is 100%: Category A = 30%, Category B = 45% and Category C = 25%. If you want to include all 4 Categories when creating your model, you could adjust your allocation percentages in Categories A, B and C and allocate up to 25% to any combination of the Investment Options in Category D. Keep in mind that you may select any Investment Option within a Category and the allocation percentages among the Categories must total 100%.


Category B – Domestic Equity Investment Options
Small-Cap Growth	Equity Index	Small-Cap Index	Diversified Research
American Funds Growth-Income	American Funds Growth	Large-Cap Value	Growth LT
Focused 30	Mid-Cap Equity	Large-Cap Growth	Small-Cap Value
Main Street Core	Comstock	Mid-Cap Growth	Small-Cap Equity
Mid-Cap Value


Category D – Asset Allocation Investment Options
AIM V.I. PowerShares ETF Allocation Fund	AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio	American Funds Asset Allocation	BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund

Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund	GE Investments Total Return Fund	Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth	Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth

Pacific Dynamix – Growth	Van Kampen LIT Global Tactical Asset Allocation Portfolio

You may make transfers between Investment Options within a particular Group or from one Group to another Group as long as you follow the Custom Model parameters. Transfers made will be subject to any transfer and market timing restrictions (see HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions). Subsequent Net Purchase Payments will be

allocated according to your current model allocation instructions. Any withdrawals must be made on a pro rata basis from each of the Investment Options you selected for your model.

You may terminate your participation in the Custom Model program at any time. However, if you own an optional living benefit rider and do not allocate your entire Contract Value to another asset allocation model or Investment Options we make available for the Riders, your Rider will terminate. If you allocate any subsequent Net Purchase Payment or Contract Value inconsistent with the Custom Model parameters, make transfers between Investment Options outside the Custom Model parameters, or do not make a withdrawal on a pro rata basis, you will no longer be participating in the Custom Model program and your Rider will terminate. Work with your financial professional and consider your options before making any Investment Option transfers. Any changes in the allocation percentages due to market performance will not be a violation of the program, since the model you created will automatically be rebalanced on a quarterly basis.

We are under no contractual obligation to continue this program and have the right to terminate or change the Custom Model program at any time.

Investing in Variable Investment Options

Each time you allocate your Net Purchase Payment to a Variable Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of “Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.

Example: You allocate $600 to the Inflation Managed Subaccount. At the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is effective, the value of one Unit in the Inflation Managed Subaccount is $15. As a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract for your $600 ($600/$15 = 40).

Your Variable Account Value Will Change

After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from time to time, your Net Purchase Payments allocated to the Variable Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original Net Purchase Payments to which those amounts can be attributed. Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number of Units credited to your Contract.

Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For example, the value of Units in the Managed Bond Subaccount will change to reflect the performance of the Managed Bond Portfolio (including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.

We calculate the value of all Subaccount Units on each Business Day.

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z


where	(Y)	=	the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
	(Z)	=	the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ¸ B) – C


where		(A)		=		the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c


where	(a)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
	(b)	=	the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
	(c)	=	any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;


(B)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
(C)	=	a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS).

The Subaccount Unit Value may increase or decrease from one valuation period to another.

When Your Purchase Payment Is Effective

Your initial Purchase Payment is effective on the day we issue your Contract. Any additional Purchase Payment is effective on the day we receive it in proper form. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests.

The day your Purchase Payment is effective determines the Unit Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract. In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your transaction is effective. Your Variable Account Value begins to reflect the investment performance results of your new allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions

Transfers

Transfers are allowed 30 days after the Contract Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this restriction but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Once your Net Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value less Loan Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option, except the DCA Plus Fixed Option. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only 2 transfers in any calendar month may involve any of the following Investment Options: AIM V.I. PowerShares ETF Allocation Fund, BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund, GE Investments Total Return Fund, International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap, Emerging Markets, or Van Kampen LIT Global Tactical Asset Allocation. In addition, only 2 transfers into or out of the American Funds Asset Allocation, American Funds Growth or American Funds Growth-Income Investment Options may occur in any calendar month.

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Equity Index Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the following Monday. Transfers to or from the Money Market Variable Investment Option are excluded from this limitation.

For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers that occur on the same day are considered 1 transfer. A transfer of Account Value from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under these limitations. Transfers that occur as a result of the DCA Plus program, the dollar cost averaging program, the portfolio rebalancing program, the earnings sweep program, approved corporate owned life insurance policy rebalancing programs or an approved asset allocation service are excluded from these limitations. Also, allocations of Net Purchase Payments are not subject to these limitations.

If you have used all 25 transfers available to you in a calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year. However, you may make 1 transfer of all or a portion of the Account Value remaining in the Variable Investment Options into the Money Market Investment Option prior to the start of the next calendar year.

There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options, or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other extraordinary circumstances.

If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your registered representative via telephone. If you (or your registered representative) request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above limitations, we will notify you (or your registered representative) immediately.

Certain restrictions apply to any available fixed option. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Transfer requests are generally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form, unless you request a date in the future or a systematic transfer program.

We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account Value in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend transfers, and to impose further limits on the number and frequency of transfers you can make.

We also reserve the right to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied uniformly to all Contract Owners.

Market-timing Restrictions

The Contract is not designed to serve as a vehicle for frequent trading in response to short-term fluctuations in the market. Accordingly, organizations or individuals that use market-timing investment strategies and make frequent transfers should not purchase the Contract. Such frequent trading can disrupt management of the underlying Portfolios and raise expenses. The transfer limitations set forth above are intended to reduce frequent trading. In addition, we monitor certain large transaction activity in an attempt to detect trading that may be disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such Contract Owners, or by a registered representative or other party acting on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are disruptive to portfolio management can have an adverse effect on Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners. While these issues can occur in connection with any of the underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the time of the closing of the market on which the security is traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.

Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part. Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass them on to you.

We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:


	•	not accepting transfer instructions from a registered representative acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and

	•	not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice, restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.

Exchanges of Annuity Units

Exchanges of Annuity Units in any Subaccount(s) to any other Subaccount(s) after the Annuity Date are limited to 4 in any 12-month period. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus and THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Systematic Transfer Options

We offer 4 systematic transfer options: dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweep. There is no charge for these options and transfers under these options are not counted towards your total transfers in a calendar year. However, they are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. You can have only one DCA Plus, dollar cost averaging, or earnings sweep program in effect at one time. Only portfolio rebalancing is available after you annuitize.

Dollar Cost Averaging

Dollar cost averaging is a method in which you buy securities in a series of regular purchases instead of in a single purchase. This allows you to average the securities’ prices over time, and may permit a “smoothing” of abrupt peaks and drops in price. Prior to your Annuity Date, you may use dollar cost averaging to transfer amounts, over time, from any Investment Option with an Account Value of at least $5,000 to one or more Variable Investment Options. Each transfer must be for at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value and/or transfer amounts but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

DCA Plus

DCA Plus provides a way to transfer amounts monthly from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to one or more Variable Investment Option(s) over a period of up to one year. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. The

minimum amount for subsequent Purchase Payments is $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the initial or subsequent Purchase Payment minimum amounts but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically by us, but not less than an annual rate of 3% (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”). The DCA Plus program can also be used with allowable Asset Allocation Models or allowable Investment Options to qualify for certain optional benefit riders offered under your Contract. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

Portfolio Rebalancing

You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable Investment Options under your Contract (e.g., 30% in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount) prior to your Annuity Date. Periodically, we will “rebalance” your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually until your Annuity Date. Only Variable Investment Options are available for rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

Earnings Sweep

You may instruct us to make automatic periodic transfers of your earnings from the Money Market Subaccount to one or more Variable Investment Options (other than the Money Market Subaccount). Detailed information appears in the SAI.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Sales Charge

A front end sales charge (“sales charge”) will be deducted from all initial and subsequent Purchase Payments that you make. The sales charge is deducted from each Purchase Payment before it is allocated to your Investment Options. The sales charge is a percentage of each Purchase Payment and the sales charge deducted will depend on your cumulative value on the day we receive your Purchase Payment. The sales charge is based on the following scale:


Cumulative Value	Sales Charge

Less than $50,000		5.5%
$50,000 - $99,999		4.5%
$100,000 - $249,999		3.5%
$250,000 - $499,999		2.5%
$500,000 - $999,999		2.0%
$1,000,000 or greater		0.5%

Your cumulative value is defined as the sum of:


	•	the current Purchase Payment, and

	•	the higher of your existing Contract Value OR the total of all previous Purchase Payments made into your existing Contract less any withdrawals.

Subject to the internal eligibility requirements of your registered representative’s firm, employees of a firm may be eligible to purchase new Contracts and make additions to existing Contracts without incurring a sales charge on their Purchase Payments. We reserve the right to modify, suspend, or terminate this program at any time.

Letter of Intent

You may also reduce the sales charges deducted by using a Letter of Intent (LOI). An LOI allows you to lower the sales charges by indicating to us in writing the total amount of Purchase Payments you plan to make during a 13-month period starting from your Contract Date. When you submit an LOI, we use the total amount of Purchase Payments you plan to submit to determine the sales charges deducted.

If at the end of the 13-month period, you did not submit the total amount of Purchase Payments you planned on as indicated in your LOI (or if the LOI amount was not met and you surrender or annuitize before the 13-month period is complete), we will deduct an additional sales charge. We will recalculate the sales charge based on your actual Purchase Payments and the additional sales charge will be deducted proportionately from all of your Investment Options at the end of the 13-month period. We will also recalculate the sales charge if death occurs during the 13-month period and the LOI amount was not met.

We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate this program at any time.

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge

We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we assume under the Contract (the “Risk Charge”). The risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial calculations at the time the Contract is issued is “mortality risk.” We also bear mortality risk in connection with death benefit payable under the Contract. The risk that the expense charges and fees under the Contract and Separate Account are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses is called “expense risk.”

This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.60% of each Subaccount’s assets. This charge may not be increased for the duration of your Contract.

The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date if you select fixed annuity payments. The base Risk Charge will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose variable annuity payments, even though we do not bear mortality risk if your Annuity Option is Period Certain Only.

We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including covering sales expenses on the Contracts.

Increase in Risk Charge if an Optional Death Benefit Rider is Purchased

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.20% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR). The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 0.80% if the SDBR is purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge will not continue after the Annuity Date. See DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits.

Administrative Fee

We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and administering the Contracts, including processing applications and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory authorities.

The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.15% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A correlation will not necessarily exist between the actual administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of that particular Contract. The Administrative Fee will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose any variable annuity. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee.

Annual Fee

We will charge you an Annual Fee of $30 on each Contract Anniversary prior to the Annuity Date, and at the time you withdraw your entire Net Contract Value (on a pro rated basis for that Contract Year) if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date. The fee is not imposed on amounts you annuitize or on payment of death benefit proceeds. The fee reimburses certain costs in administering the Contracts and the Separate Account. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee. This fee is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract.

Your Annual Fee will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are made by debiting some of the Subaccount Units previously credited to your Contract. That is, assessment of the Annual Fee does not change the Unit Value for those Subaccounts. Any portion of the Annual Fee we deduct from any of our fixed options (if available under the Contract) will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of that fixed option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate.

Optional Rider Charges

If you purchase an optional Rider listed in the table below, we will deduct an annual charge from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) on a proportionate basis.

The charge is deducted each Contract Anniversary following the Rider Effective Date. The Rider charge will be deducted while the Rider remains in effect and when the Rider terminates. The charge is deducted in arrears each Contract Anniversary.

If your Rider terminates on a Contract Anniversary, the full charge for the year will be deducted on that anniversary. If your Rider terminates prior to a Contract Anniversary, a prorated charge will be deducted on the earlier of the day the Contract terminates or the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day your Rider terminates. The charge will be determined as of the day your Rider terminates.

Any portion of the Rider’s charge we deduct from any fixed option will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of 3%. If you make a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct the charge from the final payment made to you.

The optional Rider annual charge percentage may change if a Step-Up/Reset occurs under the Rider provisions. However, the annual charge percentage will not exceed the maximum annual charge percentage (indicated in the table below) for the applicable Rider. If a Step-Up/Reset does not occur, your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was on the Rider Effective Date.

Annual Charge Percentage Table

Maximum Charge

To determine the amount to be

Annual Charge

Percentage

deducted, the Annual Charge

The Charge is

Optional Rider

Percentage

Under the Rider

Percentage is multiplied by the:

deducted on each:

Automatic Income Builder

0.95%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Contract Anniversary

See Mortality and Expense Risk Charge for the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider charge information.

Premium Taxes

Depending on your state of residence (among other factors), a tax may be imposed on your Purchase Payments (“premium tax”) at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as taxes may be imposed. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are currently in effect, but may change in the future. Some local jurisdictions also impose a tax.

If we pay any premium taxes attributable to Purchase Payments, we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value. Premium tax is subject to state requirements. We normally will charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory taxes and any federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof) measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Purchase Payments we have received. We will base this charge on the Contract Value, the amount of the transaction, the aggregate amount of Purchase Payments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount, that in our sole discretion we deem appropriately reimburses us for premium taxes paid on this Contract.

We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract, including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments. Currently, we do not impose any such charges.

Waivers and Reduced Charges

We may agree to waive or reduce charges under our Contracts, in situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple Contracts.

We will only waive or reduce such charges on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale or distribution of the Contract and/or costs associated with administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. We reserve the right to terminate waiver and reduced charge programs at any time, including for issued Contracts.

Fund Expenses

Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees and other expenses incurred by the various Portfolios of the Funds, net of any applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and expenses may vary. Each Fund is governed by its own Board of Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of expenses of any Portfolio. A Fund’s fees and expenses are described in detail in the applicable Fund Prospectus and SAI.

ANNUITIZATION

Selecting Your Annuitant

When you submit the application for your Contract, you must choose a sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or another person as Annuitant. Whether you have a sole or Joint Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The Contingent Annuitant will not have any Contract benefits, including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However, if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent Annuitant may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or Contingent) may be named

upon or after reaching his or her 86^th birthday. We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the Annuitant(s). If the Contract is owned by a Non-Natural Owner, you may not designate a Joint or Contingent Annuitant.

Annuitization

Annuitization occurs on the Annuity Date when you convert your Contract from the accumulation phase to the annuitization (income) phase. You may choose both your Annuity Date and your Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize some or all of your Net Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, (the “Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion Amount annuitized is at least $10,000. We will send the annuity payments to the payee that you designate.

If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any Contract Debt, any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, any optional Rider charge, and any applicable Annual Fee. This option of distribution may or may not be available, or may be available for only certain types of Contracts. Currently, we only allow this option on Qualified Contracts but we reserve the right to make it available on other contract types in the future. We will distribute your Net Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, and any Annual Fee to you in a single sum if the net amount of your Contract Value available to convert to an annuity is less than $10,000 on your Annuity Date. Distributions under your Contract will have tax consequences. You should consult a qualified tax adviser for information on full or partial annuitization.

If you annuitize only a portion of your Net Contract Value on your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. The second Annuity Date may not be later than the date specified in the Choosing Your Annuity Date section of this Prospectus. This option may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be aware that some or all of the payments received before the second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. We recommend that you contact a qualified tax adviser for more information if you are interested in this option.

Choosing Your Annuity Date

You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, in proper form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary. Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an Annuity Date that is prior to an Annuitant’s attained age 591/2. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date cannot be later than his or her 95^th birthday. If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date cannot be later than your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. Different requirements may apply as required by any applicable state law or the Code. We may, at our sole discretion, allow you to extend your Annuity Date. We reserve the right, at any time, to not offer any extension to your Annuity Date regardless of whether we may have granted any extensions to you or to any others in the past. Some Broker/Dealers may not allow their clients to extend the Annuity Date beyond age 95.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet the Code minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance, under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant not later than the Owner/Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date (“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more information see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Default Annuity Date and Options

If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95^th birthday or your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95^th birthday, whichever applies. However some states’ laws may require a different Annuity Date. Certain Qualified Contracts may require distributions to occur at an earlier age.

If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Net Contract Value, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be converted (if this net amount is at least $10,000) to a fixed annuity payout option.

If the net amount is less than $10,000, the entire amount will be distributed. If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, or if you have a Qualified Contract and are not married, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain. If you have a Qualified Contract and you are married, your default Annuity Option will be Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of 100%; your spouse will automatically be named your Joint Annuitant.

Choosing Your Annuity Option

You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified tax adviser, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other matters.

You may make three basic decisions about your annuity payments. First, you may choose whether you want those payments to be a fixed-dollar amount and/or a variable-dollar amount. Second, you may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity Options below). Third, you may decide how often you want annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity Date.

Fixed and Variable Payment Options

You may choose fixed annuity payments based on a fixed rate and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years, variable annuity payments that vary with the investment results of the Subaccounts you select, or you may choose both, converting one portion of the net amount you annuitize into fixed annuity payments and another portion into variable annuity payments.

If you select fixed annuity payments, each periodic annuity payment received will be equal to the initial annuity payment, unless you select a Joint and Survivor Life annuity with reduced survivor payments when the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net amount you convert to fixed annuity payments will be held in our General Account (but not under any fixed option).

If you select variable annuity payments, you may choose as many Variable Investment Options as you wish. The amount of the periodic annuity payments will vary with the investment results of the Variable Investment Options selected and may be more or less than a fixed payment option. After the Annuity Date, Annuity Units may be exchanged among available Variable Investment Options up to four times in any twelve-month period. How your Contract converts into variable annuity payments is explained in more detail in THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Annuity Options

Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract, although additional options may become available in the future. For other Annuity Options see OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS.


	1.	Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.

	2.	Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).

	3.	Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to have the payments to the surviving secondary Annuitant equal 50%, 662/3% or 100% of the original amount payable made during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 662/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant; variable annuity payments will be determined using 50% or 662/3%, as applicable, of the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount credited to the Contract as of the date of death of the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.

	4.	Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee over a specified period. You may choose to have payments continue for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).

Periodic payment amounts will differ based on the Annuity Option selected. Generally, the longer the possible payment period, the lower the payment amount.

Additionally, if variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. The amount available upon a full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return. Full or partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments are explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:


	•	the Owner;

	•	the Joint Owner;


	•	the Beneficiary; or

	•	the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract:


	•	the Joint Owner;

	•	the Beneficiary; or

	•	the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be required when you seek any distribution under your Contract, unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint Annuitant.

Your Annuity Payments

Frequency of Payments

You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. The amount of a variable payment will be determined in each period on the date corresponding to your Annuity Date, and payment will be made on the next succeeding day.

Your initial annuity payment must be at least $250. Depending on the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity payments.

Amount of the First Payment

Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the amount of the first annuity payment under your Contract, taking into consideration the annuitized portion of your Net Contract Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the Annuity Date and, for some Contracts in some states, the sex of the Annuitant(s).

For fixed annuity payments, the guaranteed income factors in our tables are based on an annual interest rate of 3% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a fixed annuity, fixed annuity payments will be based on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income factors under the Contract.

For variable annuity payments, the tables are based on an assumed annual investment return of 5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a variable annuity, your initial variable annuity payment will be based on the applicable variable annuity income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the variable annuity income factors under the Contract. You may choose any other annuity option we may offer on the option’s effective date. A higher assumed investment return would mean a larger first variable annuity payment, but subsequent payments would increase only when actual net investment performance exceeds the higher assumed rate and would fall when actual net investment performance is less than the higher assumed rate. A lower assumed rate would mean a smaller first payment and a more favorable threshold for increases and decreases. If the actual net investment performance is a constant 5% annually, annuity payments will be level. The assumed investment return is explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS

Death Benefits

Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on proof of death of the sole surviving Annuitant or of any Contract Owner while the Contract is in force.

Any death benefit payable will be calculated on the “Notice Date”, which is the day on which we receive, in proper form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If a Contract has multiple recipients, death benefit proceeds will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, in proper form, from any recipient. The death benefit proceeds still remaining to be paid to other recipients will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

Death Benefit Proceeds

Death benefit proceeds will be payable on the Notice Date. Such proceeds will be reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes and any Contract Debt. The death benefit proceeds may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the IRS and approved by us. The Owner’s spouse may continue the Contract (see Death Benefits – Spousal Continuation). In addition, there may be legal requirements that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax adviser before making a death benefit election.

The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:


	•	Owner,

	•	Joint Owner,

	•	Beneficiary, or

	•	Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

Death Benefit Amount

The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:


	•	your Contract Value as of that day, or

	•	your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.

We calculate the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and the death benefit will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

See APPENDIX B: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT RIDER (SDBR) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.

Spousal Continuation

Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the Annuitant, or the Annuity Date, except in the case of a Qualified Contract issued under section 403 of the Code. On the Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds (“Add-In Amount”). The Add-In Amount will be added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. There will not be an adjustment to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date. The Add-In Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and may be, under certain circumstances, considered earnings. A Joint Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract.

Example: On the Notice Date, the Owner’s surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract. On that date, the death benefit proceeds were $100,000 and the Contract Value was $85,000. Since the surviving spouse elected to continue the Contract in lieu of receiving the death benefit proceeds, we will increase the Contract Value by an Add-In Amount of $15,000 ($100,000–$85,000=$15,000). If the Contract Value on the Notice Date was $100,000 or higher, then nothing would be added to the Contract Value.

Death of Annuitant

If a sole surviving Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.

If there is more than one Annuitant and an Annuitant who is not an Owner dies, no death benefit proceeds will be payable. The designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person in the following order:


	•	a surviving Joint Annuitant, or

	•	a surviving Contingent Annuitant.

Death of Owner

If a Contract Owner dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.

Non-Natural Owner

If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in Section 401 or 403 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules. If there is a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date, such change will be treated as the death of the Owner. The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or (b) the Contract Value, less any annual fee and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash distribution and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefits Proceeds section.

Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date, distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within 1 year after the Owner’s death or complete distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death. In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient must receive a final lump sum payment by the fifth anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner, or elect to receive an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or, if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof, in proper form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier, 60 days (or shorter period as we permit) prior to the first anniversary of the Owner’s death, the lump sum option will be deemed elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will consider that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of the death benefit proceeds. If a Non-Qualified Contract has Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract Owner to die.

The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us. Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the Owner’s designation.

Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

Under Internal Revenue Service regulations and our administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a Qualified Plan as defined in Sections 401, 403, 457(b) or Sections 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death benefit proceeds must be made to the designated recipient in accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”). The second rule requires distribution of the entire death benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the fifth anniversary of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year rule”).

However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are modified if the sole primary Beneficiary is a surviving spouse. If the surviving spouse elects not to do an eligible rollover to an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name, then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However, the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy. If the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of required distributions beyond the first anniversary of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse may defer required distributions until the later of:


	•	December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant died, or

	•	December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant would have turned 701/2.

Further, under our administrative procedures, if the required distributions election is not received by us in good order by December 31 of the year following the Annuitant’s death or by December 31 of the year in which the Annuitant would have attained age 701/2, the lump

sum option will be deemed by us to have been elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will treat that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds.

If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at the time of the Annuitant’s death.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider at the time your application is completed. You may not purchase the SDBR after the Contract Date. The SDBR may only be purchased if the age of each Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date.

How the Rider Works

If you purchase the SDBR at the time your application is completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant or the first Owner, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:


	(a)	the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

The Death Benefit Amount as of any day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:


	•	your Contract Value as of that day, or

	•	your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.


	(b)	the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole surviving Annuitant or the first death of an Owner, prior to the Annuity Date and is determined as follows:

First we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of your first Contract Anniversary and each subsequent Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her 81^st birthday (each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone Date”).

We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:


	•	adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since the Milestone Date, and

	•	subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase the SDBR. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

Any death benefit paid under this Rider will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

See APPENDIX B: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT RIDER (SDBR) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.

Termination

The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:


	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

	•	the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

The Rider may not otherwise be cancelled.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under your Contract while the Annuitants are living and your Contract is in force. You may surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time. If you surrender your Contract it will be terminated as of the Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right to require a 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific percentage of an Account Value or your Net Contract Value. You may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment Options. If you do not specify Investment Options, your withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options proportionately. Each partial withdrawal must be for $500 or more. Pre-authorized partial withdrawals must be at least $250, except for pre-authorized withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we also reserve the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, or if your partial withdrawal request is for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section below, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. However, we will not terminate your Contract if you own an optional rider and a partial withdrawal reduces the Net Contract Value to an amount less than $1,000. Partial withdrawals from any fixed option in any Contract Year may be subject to restrictions.

See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

Amount Available for Withdrawal

The amount available to you for withdrawal is your Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) at the end of the Business Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any applicable Annual Fee, optional Rider Charges, and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

You assume investment risk on Net Purchase Payments in the Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the total Net Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal income tax on its taxable portion and may be subject to a tax penalty of 10% if you have not reached age 591/2. Pre-authorized withdrawals cannot be used to continue the Contract beyond the Annuity Date. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Additional information and options are set forth in the SAI.

Special Requirements for Full Withdrawals and Payments to Third Party Payees

Instructions for a full withdrawal and surrender of your Contract in proper form includes, among other things, a return of the original Contract or a lost contract affidavit. For your convenience, our Withdrawal Request form includes a lost contract affidavit for your use in providing us with your full withdrawal and surrender instructions. If you wish to have a full or partial withdrawal check made payable to a third-party payee, you must provide complete instructions and an original signature is required on the Withdrawal Request form or your withdrawal request instructions. If you wish to withdraw the entire amount available under your Contract, you must either return your Contract to us or sign and submit a Withdrawal Request form or a Lost Contract Affidavit if no Withdrawal Request form is completed.

Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans

Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) or to transfers from a custodial account (as defined in Section 403(b)(7) of the Code) except in cases of your:


	•	severance from employment,

	•	death,


	•	disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,

	•	reaching age 591/2, or

	•	hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.

These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity. In the case of a 403(b) plan, these limitations do not apply to certain salary reduction contributions made, and investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction contributions, and do not include investment results. This additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction contributions made, or investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a tax penalty of 10% if the distribution is not transferred directly to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual retirement annuity. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES. Distributions may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and ERISA rules relating to withdrawals from Contracts issued to Qualified Plans are complex. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax adviser and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Effective Date of Withdrawal Requests

Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form. If you make Purchase Payments by check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards, payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

Tax Consequences of Withdrawals

All withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will generally have federal income tax consequences, which could include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before making any withdrawal or selecting the pre-authorized withdrawal option. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract, but may vary if required by state law. The amount of your refund may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made. If you return your Contract and it is post-marked during the Free Look period, it will be cancelled as of the date we receive your Contract. In most states, you will then receive a refund of your Contract Value, based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a refund of any amounts that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

In some states we are required to refund your Purchase Payments. If your Contract was issued in such a state and you cancel your Contract during the Free Look period, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments or the Contract Value. In addition, if your Contract was issued as an IRA and you return your Contract within 7 days after you receive it, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value.

Your Net Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you indicated on your application, unless otherwise required by state law. If state law requires that your Net Purchase Payments must be allocated to Investment Options different than you requested, we will comply with state requirements. At the end of the Free Look period, we will allocate your Net Purchase Payments based on your allocation instructions.

See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State Considerations.

For replacement business and in some states, the Free Look period may be extended and the amount returned may be different than as otherwise described above. Please consult with your registered representative if you have any questions regarding your state’s Free Look period and the amount of any refund.

You will find a complete description of the Free Look period and amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover page, or on a notice that accompanies your Contract.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary, depending on the state in which your Contract is issued.

OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS

General Information

Some broker/dealers may limit their clients from purchasing some optional benefits based upon the client’s age or other factors. You should work with your investment professional to decide whether an optional benefit is appropriate for you.

All references to Purchase Payments refer to gross Purchase Payments unless otherwise specified.

Investment Allocation Requirements

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must allocate your entire Contract Value to an asset allocation program or Investment Options we make available for these Riders. You may allocate your Contract Value according to the following requirements:


	•	100% to one allowable Asset Allocation Model, OR

	•	100% among allowable Investment Options.

Currently, the allowable Asset Allocation Models and Investment Options are as follows:


Allowable Asset Allocation Models		Allowable Investment Options

Portfolio Optimization Model A		AIM V.I. PowerShares ETF Allocation Fund
Portfolio Optimization Model B		AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio
Portfolio Optimization Model C		American Funds Asset Allocation
Portfolio Optimization Model D		BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund
Custom Model		Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund
		GE Investments Total Return Fund
		Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth
		Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth
		Pacific Dynamix – Growth
		Van Kampen LIT Global Tactical Asset Allocation Portfolio

You may transfer your entire Contract Value between an allowable Asset Allocation Model and allowable Investment Options, between allowable Asset Allocation Models or between allowable Investment Options. Keep in mind that you must allocate your entire Contract Value to either one allowable Asset Allocation Model or among the allowable Investment Options. If you do not allocate your entire Net Purchase Payment or Contract Value according to the requirements above, your Rider will terminate.

Allowable Asset Allocation Models – Portfolio Optimization. You may transfer your entire Contract Value to a different Portfolio Optimization Model without affecting your Rider. However, if you change the allocation percentages within the Portfolio Optimization Model you have selected, you will no longer be participating in the Portfolio Optimization program and your Rider will terminate. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Portfolio Optimization for information about the program.

Allowable Asset Allocation Models – Custom Model. You may also make transfers between the Investment Options available under the Custom Model program as long as you follow the Custom Model parameters. However, if you make transfers or change the allocation percentages within your Custom Model and they do not comply with the Custom Model parameters, you will no longer be participating

in the Custom Model program and your Rider will terminate. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Custom Model for information about the program.

Allowable Investment Options. You may allocate your entire Contract Value among any of the allowable Investment Options listed in the table above.

By adding an optional living benefit Rider to your Contract, you agree to the above referenced investment allocation requirements for the entire period that you own a Rider. These requirements may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. We reserve the right to add, remove or change allowable asset allocation programs or allowable Investment Options at any time. We may make such a change due to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, or when we believe a change is necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. If such a change is required, we will provide you with reasonable notice (generally 90 calendar days unless we are required to give less notice) prior to the effective date of such change to allow you to reallocate your Contract Value to maintain your rider benefits. If you do not reallocate your Contract Value your rider will terminate.

We will send you written notice in the event any transaction made by you will involuntarily cause the Rider to terminate for failure to invest according to the investment allocation requirements. However, you will have 10 Business Days after the date of our written notice (“10 day period”), to instruct us to take appropriate corrective action to continue participation in an allowable asset allocation program or allowable Investment Options to continue the Rider.

Automatic Income Builder Rider

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary (if available) if the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase and you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

Rider Terms

Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base.

If the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the withdrawal percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year.

If the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is younger than age 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:


	•	the withdrawal percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or

	•	the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

The Protected Payment Amount will never be less than zero.

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will never be less than zero and will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.

Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The Remaining Protected Balance will never be less than zero.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.

Initial Values – The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:


	•	initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or

	•	Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to the applicable withdrawal percentage (based on the Owner’s age at the time of purchase) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base.

How the Rider Works

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may continue after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. If you are older than 591/2 and if you delay taking withdrawals, this Rider also provides the potential to receive a 0.10% increase in the withdrawal percentage per year, which can increase the percentage that you may withdraw each Contract Year without reducing your Protected Payment Base.

In addition, beginning with the first (1^st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age 591/2, separation from service, disability) and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – IRAs and Qualified Plans.

Withdrawal Percentage

On or prior to the date of the first withdrawal (measured from the later of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date) the withdrawal percentage is determined as follows based on the oldest Owner’s age (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner):


Age		Withdrawal Percentage

Before 591/2		4.0%
591/2 - 69		4.0%
70 - 84		5.0%
85 and older		6.0%

If the first withdrawal (measured from the later of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date) is taken on or after age 591/2, the withdrawal percentage will automatically increase according to the table above based on age as of the most recent Contract Anniversary.

If the first withdrawal (measured from the later of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date) is taken prior to age 591/2, the withdrawal percentage will be 4.0% until the Remaining Protected Balance is depleted and will remain unchanged unless a Reset occurs. Once a Reset occurs, the withdrawal percentage will be the withdrawal percentage that corresponds to the age at the time of the first withdrawal following such Reset.

There is an opportunity for an increase in the withdrawal percentage. The withdrawal percentage in the table above will increase by 0.10% for each Rider year a withdrawal is not taken beginning on the later of the Contract Anniversary following the Owner’s age 591/2 or the Rider Effective Date. In addition, the increase in the withdrawal percentage will still be included as you reach a new age band (for example, if you have already taken a withdrawal and at age 69 your withdrawal percentage is 4.4%, then your withdrawal percentage would be 5.4% the Contract Anniversary immediately after you turn 70). However, once a withdrawal is taken (including an RMD Withdrawal), regardless of the Owner’s age when the withdrawal is taken, no further increase in the withdrawal percentage will be available and eligibility for the increase cannot be reinstated with a Reset.

The withdrawal percentage, including any 0.10% increase, will not be reduced as a result of a Reset.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. Immediately following the withdrawal the Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX A: AUTOMATIC INCOME BUILDER RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount as a result of an excess withdrawal.)

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the RMD withdrawal amount.

The Worker, Retiree, and Employer Recovery Act of 2008 provides for a temporary waiver of 2009 RMDs. If you elect to take your 2009 RMD (do not waive) then no adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an excess withdrawal if the above requirements are satisfied.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:


	•	if the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or

	•	was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the day of the death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.


	•	the Protected Payment Amount payments will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,

	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option,

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit, and

	•	any payments made to you of the Remaining Protected Balance may be taxable to you as ordinary income, and if you are under the age of 591/2, may be subject to an additional 10% federal tax penalty.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary through a series of pre-authorized withdrawals with a payment frequency then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid

over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Depletion of Remaining Protected Balance

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduces the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:

If the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or

	•	was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each year until the day of the death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took your first withdrawal before age 591/2 and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and your first withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or after age 591/2. See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are younger than age 591/2 when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity for a Reset.

If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance

Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued, except that eligibility for the increase in the withdrawal percentage cannot be reinstated with a Reset once a withdrawal is taken. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are reset to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. If you are within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above. If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Automatic Reset – Future Participation. You may elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries. If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of this Reset.

If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base as of the

Contract Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised to work with your investment professional prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1^st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached permits Purchase Payments after the first (1^st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

Annuitization

If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:


	•	the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments.

The annuity payments described in this subsection are available to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to age 591/2 and no Resets have occurred.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero. If the Remaining Protected Balance is zero when the Owner dies, this Rider will terminate.

The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options available under this Rider for subsequent Contract Anniversaries. If a reset takes place then the provisions of this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the surviving spouse. The withdrawal percentage will be determined based on the age of the surviving spouse and the new withdrawal percentage may be higher or lower than what the withdrawal percentage was prior to death. In addition, if the surviving spouse is 591/2 when a reset occurs, the surviving spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (based on the new Protected Payment Base and withdrawal percentage) for life.

Any 0.10% increase to the withdrawal percentage previously added will apply but no further increases to the withdrawal percentage will be added.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

	•	the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified (excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information), or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount. In this case, the Rider and the Contract will terminate:


	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX A: AUTOMATIC INCOME BUILDER RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Pacific Life

Pacific Life Insurance Company is a life insurance company domiciled in Nebraska. Along with our subsidiaries and affiliates, our operations include life insurance, annuity, pension and institutional products, mutual funds, broker-dealer operations, and investment advisory services. At the end of 2008, we had $214.8 billion of individual life insurance in force and total admitted assets of approximately $83.7 billion.

We are authorized to conduct our life insurance and annuity business in the District of Columbia and in all states except New York. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

We were originally organized on January 2, 1868, under the name “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company of California” and reincorporated as “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company” on July 22, 1936. On September 1, 1997, we converted from a mutual life insurance company to a stock life insurance company ultimately controlled by a mutual holding company and were authorized by California regulatory authorities to change our name to Pacific Life Insurance Company. On September 1, 2005, Pacific Life changed from a California corporation to a Nebraska corporation. Pacific Life is a subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, a holding company, which, in turn, is a subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company, a mutual holding company. Under their respective charters, Pacific Mutual Holding Company must always hold at least 51% of the outstanding voting stock of Pacific LifeCorp, and Pacific LifeCorp must always own 100% of the voting stock of Pacific Life. Owners of Pacific Life’s annuity contracts and life insurance policies have certain membership interests in Pacific Mutual Holding Company, consisting principally of the right to vote on the election of the Board of Directors of the mutual holding company and on other matters, and certain rights upon liquidation or dissolutions of the mutual holding company.

Our subsidiary, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) serves as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers, whose registered representatives are authorized by state insurance departments to sell the Contracts.

We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with respect to our General Account assets.

Separate Account A

Separate Account A was established on September 7, 1994 as a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”), as a type of investment company called a “unit investment trust.” We established the Separate Account under the laws of the state of California. The Separate Account is maintained under the laws of the state of Nebraska.

Obligations arising under your Contract are our general corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss (whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to our other income, gain or loss.

We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence its operations and for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of charges we make against the Separate Account and investment results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on the Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our General Account.

The Separate Account is not the sole investor in the Funds. Investment in a Fund by other separate accounts in connection with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may create conflicts. See the accompanying Prospectus and SAI for the Funds for more information.

FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

As of December 31, 2008 no Contracts were issued. As a result, no condensed financial information is included in this Prospectus.

FEDERAL TAX ISSUES

The following summary of federal income tax issues is based on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable foreign, state or local tax laws. We do not make any guarantee regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts. Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax adviser for complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract. Additional tax information is included in the SAI.

Diversification Requirements and Investor Control

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements in order for the contract to be treated as an annuity contract and qualify for tax deferral. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the contract meet these requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Pacific Select Fund SAI.

In addition, for a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of investor control the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable annuities. For more information regarding investor control, please refer to the contract SAI.

Taxation of Annuities – General Provisions

Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract. Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes.

Non-Qualified Contracts – General Rules

These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax adviser if you are purchasing a Qualified Contract.

Taxes Payable

A Contract Owner is not taxed on the increases in the value of a Contract until an amount is received or deemed to be received. An amount could be received or deemed to be received, for example, if there is a partial distribution, a lump sum distribution, an Annuity payment or a material change in the Contract. Increases in Contract Value that are received or deemed to be received are taxable to the Contract Owner as ordinary income. Distributions of net investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account, elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only when it is distributed to you.

Non-Natural Persons as Owners

If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that the contract owner will be subject to current tax on annual increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some other exception applies. Certain entities, such as some trusts, may be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons. Corporations, including S corps, C corps, LLCs, partnerships and FLPs, and tax exempt entities are non-natural persons that will not be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons.

Addition of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract

The addition of a rider to the Contract, or a material change in the Contract’s provisions, such as a change in Contract ownership or an assignment of the Contract, could cause it to be considered newly issued or entered into for tax purposes, and thus could cause a taxable event or the Contract to lose certain grandfathered tax status. Please contact your tax adviser for more information.

Taxes Payable on Withdrawals Prior to the Annuity Date

Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, will be treated first as taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds the aggregate of your Purchase Payments reduced by non-taxable amounts previously received (investment in the Contract), and then as non-taxable recovery of your Purchase Payments. Therefore, you include in your gross income the smaller of: a) the amount of the partial withdrawal, or b) the amount by which your Contract Value immediately before you receive the distribution exceeds your investment in the Contract at that time. If at the time of a partial withdrawal your Contract Value does not exceed your investment in the Contract, then the withdrawal will not be includable in gross income and will simply reduce your investment in the Contract.

Exceptions to this rule are distributions in full discharge of your Contract (a full surrender) or distributions from contracts issued and investments made before August 14, 1982.

The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a withdrawal subject to these rules.

You should consult your tax adviser for additional information regarding taking a partial or a full distribution from your Contract.

Multiple Contracts (Aggregation Rule)

Multiple Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued after October 21, 1988, by us or our affiliates to the same Owner during the same calendar year are treated as one Contract for purposes of determining the taxation of distributions (the amount includible in gross income under Code Section 72(e)) prior to the Annuity Date from any of the Contracts. A Contract received in a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035 may be treated as a new Contract for this purpose. For Contracts subject to the Aggregation Rule, the values of the Contracts and the investments in the Contracts should be added together to determine the taxation under Code Section 72(e). Withdrawals will be treated first as withdrawals of income until all of the income from all such Contracts is withdrawn. The Treasury Department has specific authority under Code Section 72(e)(11) to issue regulations to prevent the avoidance of the income-out-first rules for withdrawals prior to the Annuity Date through the serial purchase of Contracts or otherwise. As of the date of this Prospectus there are no regulations interpreting these aggregation provisions.

10% Tax Penalty Applicable to Certain Withdrawals and Annuity Payments

The Code provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or other distribution may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:


	•	made on or after the date you reach age 591/2,

	•	made by a Beneficiary after your death,

	•	attributable to your becoming disabled,

	•	any payment made under an immediate annuity,

	•	attributable to an investment in the Contract made prior to August 14, 1982, or

	•	any distribution that is a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (Code Section 72(q) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary.

Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts (see Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments and the applicable Qualified Contracts).

Taxes Payable on Optional Rider Charges

It is our understanding that the charges relating to any optional death benefit rider are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report any optional death benefit rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

Distributions After the Annuity Date

After you annuitize, a portion of each annuity payment you receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments” means the aggregate Purchase Payments less any amounts that were previously received under the Contract but not included in income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances, subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment pattern may result in the imposition of a tax penalty.) The remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the

period over which annuity payments are expected to be received, which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and, where a lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to a tax penalty.

Distributions to Beneficiary After Contract Owner’s Death

Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the Beneficiary as those that apply to the Contract Owner, except that the early withdrawal tax penalty does not apply. Thus, any annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into taxable and non-taxable portions.

If within sixty days after the date on which a lump sum death benefit first becomes payable and the Beneficiary elects to receive annuity or life expectancy payments in lieu of the lump sum death benefit, then the Beneficiary will not be treated for tax purposes as having received the lump sum death benefit in the tax year it first becomes payable. Rather, in that case, the Beneficiary will be taxed on the annuity or life expectancy payments as they are received.

If death occurs after the Annuity Date, but before the expiration of a period certain option, the Beneficiary will recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made and may be allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the unrecovered Investments. A lump sum payment taken by the Beneficiary in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.

Contract Owner’s Estate

Generally, any amount payable to a Beneficiary after the Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for federal estate tax purposes. If the inclusion of the value of the Contract triggers a federal estate tax to be paid, the Beneficiary may be able to use a deduction called Income in Respect of Decedent (IRD) in calculating the income taxes payable upon receipt of the death benefit proceeds. In addition, designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is 371/2 or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax (GSTT) consequences under section 2601 of the Code. You should consult with a qualified tax advisor if you have questions about federal estate tax, IRD, or GSTT.

Gifts of Annuity Contracts

Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity start date will trigger tax reporting to the donor on the gain on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% early withdrawal tax penalty and gift tax also may be applicable. This provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.

Tax Withholding for Non-Qualified Contracts

Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be subject to withholding to meet federal income tax obligations. For nonperiodic distributions, you will have the option to provide us with withholding information at the time of your withdrawal request. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we will generally withhold 10% of the taxable distribution amount and remit it to the IRS. For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us with your application. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents. Generally, an election out of federal withholding will also be considered an election out of state withholding.

Please call 1-800-722-4448 with any questions about the required withholding information. Registered Representatives may call us at 1-800-722-2333.

Tax Withholding for Non-resident Aliens or Non U.S. Persons

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.

Exchanges of Non-Qualified Contracts (1035 Exchanges)

You may make your initial or an additional Purchase Payment through an exchange of an existing annuity contract or endowment life insurance contract pursuant to Section 1035 of the Code (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by completing the Transfer/Exchange form, indicating in the appropriate section of the form that you are making a 1035 exchange and submitting any applicable state replacement form. The form is available by calling your Registered Representative or by calling our Contract Owner number at

1-800-722-4448. Registered Representatives can call 1-800-722-2333. Once completed, the form should be mailed to us, along with the annuity contract or life insurance policy you are exchanging. If you are making an initial Purchase Payment, a completed Contract application should also be attached.

In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity or life insurance contract for another annuity contract. Transactions under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special rules and may require special procedures and record keeping, particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a 1035 exchange.

Partial 1035 Exchanges

A partial exchange is the direct transfer of only a portion of an existing annuity’s Contract Value to a new annuity contract. Rev. Proc. 2008-24 adopted the provisions of Notice 2003-51, with some modifications, finalizing the guidelines for partial 1035 exchanges. Under Rev. Proc. 2008-24, the 24 month period is reduced to 12 months, so that a partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if there are no distributions, from either annuity, within 12 months of the partial 1035 exchange. Alternatively, a partial 1035 exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if the taxpayer demonstrates that any distribution taken within the 12 months is due to a specifically identified condition that occurred between the date of the partial transfer and the distribution (the conditions are death, disability, attaining age 591/2, divorce or loss of employment). Rev Proc. 2008-24 removes the subjective element of Notice 2003-51 (whether the distribution was contemplated at the time of the partial exchange). Also, Rev. Proc. 2008-24 provides that if the partial exchange does not qualify as a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035, it will be treated as a taxable distribution with a subsequent repurchase, and that if the partial exchange is treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 and this Rev. Proc., the two contracts will not be aggregated and treated as one contract, but rather will be treated as two separate contracts for tax and penalty purposes.

You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a partial 1035 exchange.

Impact of Federal Income Taxes

In general, in the case of Non-Qualified Contracts, if you are an individual and expect to accumulate your Contract Value over a relatively long period of time without making significant withdrawals, there may be federal income tax advantages in purchasing such a Contract. This is because any increase in Contract Value is not subject to current taxation. Income taxes are deferred until the money is withdrawn, at which point taxation occurs only on the gain from the investment in the Contract. With income taxes deferred, you may accumulate more money over the long term through a variable annuity than you may through non-tax-deferred investments. The advantage may be greater if you decide to liquidate your Contract Value in the form of monthly annuity payments after your retirement, or if your tax rate is lower at that time than during the period that you held the Contract, or both.

When withdrawals or distributions are taken from the variable annuity, the gain is taxed as ordinary income. This may be a potential disadvantage because money that had been invested in other types of assets may qualify for a more favorable federal tax rate. For example, the tax rate applicable both to the sale of capital gain assets held more than 1 year and to the receipt of qualifying dividends by individuals is generally 15% (5% for lower-income individuals). In contrast, an ordinary income tax rate of up to 35% applies to taxable withdrawals on distributions from a variable annuity. Also, withdrawals or distributions taken from a variable annuity may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of the taxable portion, although exceptions to the tax penalty may apply.

An owner of a variable annuity cannot deduct or offset losses on transfers to or from Subaccounts, or at the time of any partial withdrawals. If you surrender your Contract and your Net Contract Value is less than the aggregate of your investments in the Contract (reduced by any previous non-taxable distributions), there may be a deductible ordinary income loss, although the deduction may be limited. Consult with your tax adviser regarding the impact of federal income taxes on your specific situation.

Taxes on Pacific Life

Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code. The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of charges to the Separate Account or your Contract for such taxes. Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable, directly or indirectly, to investments in your Contract.

Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your Contract.

Given the uncertainty of future changes in applicable federal, state or local tax laws, we cannot appropriately describe the effect a tax law change may have on taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or your Contract.

Qualified Contracts – General Rules

The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each type of Qualified Plan and IRAs differ from each other and from those for Non-Qualified Contracts. No attempt is made herein to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Participants under such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the Contract issued in connection therewith.

Tax Deferral

It is important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral. The other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options, guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer among investment options without any sales charge. You should consider if the Contract is a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified Plan or IRA.

Taxes Payable

Generally, amounts received from Qualified Contracts are taxed as ordinary income under Section 72, to the extent that they are not treated as a tax free recovery of contributions. Different rules apply for Roth IRAs. Consult your tax advisor before requesting a distribution from a Qualified Contract.

10% Tax Penalty for Early Withdrawals

Generally, distributions from IRAs and Qualified Plans that occur before you attain age 591/2 are subject to a 10% tax penalty imposed on the amount of the distribution that is includable in gross income, with certain exceptions. These exceptions include distributions:


	•	made to a beneficiary after the owner’s/participant’s death,

	•	attributable to the owner/participant becoming disabled under Section 72(m)(7),

	•	that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (also referred to as SEPPs or 72(t) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary,

	•	for certain higher education expenses (IRAs only),

	•	used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical expenses (IRAs only),

	•	for costs related to the purchase of your first home (IRAs only), and

	•	(except for IRAs) made to an employee after separation from service after reaching age 55 (or age 50 in the case of a qualified public safety employee).

Tax Withholding for Qualified Contracts

Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee, surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the taxable amount of the distribution, unless:


	•	the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or

	•	the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.

The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of taxable distributions are subject to withholding unless the distributee elects not to have withholding apply.

IRAs and Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders

As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special considerations for purchases of any optional living or death benefit riders. IRS regulations state that Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance contracts. We believe that these regulations do not prohibit the optional living or death benefit riders from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that a Contract that has optional living or death

benefit riders and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to the Owner.

Similarly, section 401 plans, section 403(b), 457(b) annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer incidental death benefits. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) could take the position that the enhanced death benefits provided by optional benefit riders are not incidental. In addition, to the extent that the optional benefit riders alter the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.

It is our understanding that the charges relating to the optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report the rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

Required Minimum Distributions

The regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in Qualified Plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)), Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must be distributed each year.

Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant no later than the Owner/Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. On December 23, 2008, President Bush signed the “Worker, Retiree and Employer Recovery Act of 2008” (the “Act”) into law. Among other things, the Act contains a provision which provides a temporary, one-year waiver of RMDs for IRA owners, plan participants, and their beneficiaries. Under the Act, RMDs are not required to be taken for 2009. Please consult your tax or legal advisor for more information about the Act and the 2009 RMD waiver.

The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 701/2. The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code or a Section 403(b) annuity is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 701/2, or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the Owner/Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.

The IRS issued Final and Temporary Regulations on April 17, 2002 (“Final Regulations”). Effective January 1, 2003, the IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.

The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note that under these Final Regulations, the IRA owner does not need to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn age 701/2.

The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse, who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.

If the Owner/Annuitant dies prior to his RBD or complete distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be distributed as provided in the “Qualified Contract Distribution Rules” section of this Prospectus. For non-spouse beneficiaries, life expectancy is initially computed by use of the Single Life Table of the Final Regulations (Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9). Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the life expectancy of the Beneficiary by one in each following calendar year.

For calendar year 2003 and thereafter, taxpayers (and the underlying Qualified Plan) must rely on the Final and Temporary Regulations (discussed above) for determining RMDs. If any future guidance from the IRS is more restrictive than the guidance in these Final and Temporary Regulations, the future guidance will be issued without retroactive effect.

The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the applicable proposed Regulations thereunder.

Actuarial Value

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, RMDs may be calculated based on the sum of the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs may be larger than if the calculation were based on the contract value only, which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any optional riders.

RMDs and Annuity Options

Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected for receipt of RMDs as annuity payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 generally may be:


	•	no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches age 701/2, and

	•	must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant.

Under Annuity Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant, the 662/3% and 100% elections specified below may not be available. The restrictions on options for retirement plans that qualify under Sections 401 and 408 also apply to a retirement plan that qualifies under Section 403(b) with respect to amounts that accrued after December 31, 1986.

Loans

Certain Owners of Qualified Contracts may borrow against their Contracts. Otherwise loans from us are not permitted. You may request a loan from us, using your Contract Value as your only security if yours is a Qualified Contract that is:


	•	not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,

	•	issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and

	•	issued under a Plan that permits Loans (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).

You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum loan amount is $1,000, subject to certain state limitations. Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not exceed the lesser of:


	•	50% of the amount available for withdrawal under this Contract (see WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals – Amount Available for Withdrawal), or

	•	$50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.

If your request for a loan is processed, you will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. This loan rate may vary by state.

Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan Account Value accrues daily beginning on the day following the effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance with your most recent allocation instructions. Loan repayments will not be reduced by sales charges. For more information about loans, including the consequences of loans, loan procedures, loan terms and repayment terms, see the SAI.

We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the Code or interpretations thereof. We urge you to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction under your Contract.

IRAs and Qualified Plans

The following is only a general discussion about types of IRAs and Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties including, but not limited to, notification of distribution options, disbursement of Plan benefits, handling any processing and administration of Qualified Plan loans, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions from the Plan to Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan participants and IRA contributions from Plan participants. Our administrative duties are limited to administration of the Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable. Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions to the applicable payee and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with information regarding individuals with signatory authority on the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified Contract, you should consult with your plan administrator and/or a qualified tax adviser. You should also consult with a qualified tax adviser and/or plan administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Individual Retirement Annuities (“IRAs”)

In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under Code 408, there are SEP IRAs under Code Section 408(k), Roth IRAs governed by Code Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under Section 401, 403(b), or 457(b) of the Code that include after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs subject to the same rules and limitations as

traditional IRAs. Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to differing limitations. The following is a very general description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans.

Traditional IRAs

Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed each year, the persons who may be eligible to contribute, when rollovers are available and when distributions must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a deductible or non-deductible basis.

Annual contributions are generally allowed for persons who have not attained age 701/2 and who have compensation (as defined by the IRS) of at least the contribution amount. Distributions of minimum amounts specified by the Code must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain age 701/2. Failure to make mandatory minimum distributions may result in imposition of a 50% tax penalty on any difference between the required distribution amount and the amount actually distributed. Additional distribution rules apply after your death.

You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds (such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity contracts or securities) from certain existing Qualified Plans into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply to any rollover distribution from your existing Qualified Plan if the distribution is not transferred directly to your traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee to your traditional IRA.

SIMPLE IRAs

The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small Employers (“SIMPLE Plan”) is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(p)(2). Depending upon the SIMPLE Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA established by each participant of the SIMPLE Plan. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 591/2. In addition, the tax penalty is increased to 25% for amounts received or rolled to another IRA or Qualified Plan during the 2-year period beginning on the date an employee first participated in a qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan maintained by their employer. Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will generally include employee salary deferral contributions and employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be transferred to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, a 403(b), a 457(b) or other Qualified Plan after the required 2-year period.

SEP-IRAs

A Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) is an employer sponsored retirement plan under which an employer is allowed to make contributions toward their employees’ retirement, as well as their own retirement (if the employer is self-employed). A SEP is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(k). Under a SEP, a separate IRA account called a SEP-IRA is set up by or for each eligible employee and the employer makes the contribution to the account. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 591/2.

Roth IRAs

Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed and the persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to minimum required distribution rules during the Contract Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining in a Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after the death of the Contract Owner/Annuitant or distributed over the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA under certain circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a “conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified tax adviser.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at the time of either a full or partial conversion from a Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional contract benefits.

Tax Sheltered Annuities (“TSAs”)

Employees of certain tax-exempt organizations, such as public schools or hospitals, may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code Section 403(b). Salary deferral amounts received from employers for these employees are excludable from the employees’ gross income (subject to maximum contribution limits). Distributions under these Contracts must comply with certain limitations as to

timing, or result in tax penalties. Distributions from amounts contributed to a TSA pursuant to a salary reduction arrangement, may be made from a TSA only upon attaining age 591/2, severance from employment, death, disability, or financial hardship. Section 403(b) annuity distributions can be rolled over to other Qualified Plans in a manner similar to those permitted by Qualified Plans that are maintained pursuant to Section 401 of the Code.

In accordance with Code Section 403(b) and final regulations published on July 26, 2007 (“Final Regulations”), as of January 1, 2009, we are required to provide information regarding loans or hardship distributions from your Contract to your 403(b) employer or an agent of your 403(b) employer, upon request. In addition, prior to processing your request for a loan, a hardship distribution or a rollover, we are required to verify certain information about you with your 403(b) employer (or if applicable, former 403(b) employer).

Section 457(b) Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plans

Certain employees of governmental entities or tax exempt employers may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Contract of an eligible plan are subject to limitations. Subject to plan provisions and a qualifying triggering event, assets in a Section 457(b) plan established by a governmental entity may be transferred or rolled into an IRA or another Qualified Plan, if the Qualified Plan allows the transfer or rollover. If a rollover to an IRA is completed, the assets become subject to IRA rules, including the 10% penalty on distributions prior to age 591/2. Assets from other plans may be rolled into a governmental 457(b) plan if the 457(b) plan allows the rollover and if the investment provider is able to segregate the assets for tax reporting purposes. Consult both the distributing plan and the receiving plan prior to making this election. Assets in a 457(b) plan set up by a tax exempt employer may not be rolled to a different type of Qualified Plan or IRA at any time.

401(k) Plans; Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans

Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan description for more information.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Voting Rights

We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at shareholders’ meetings of the Funds. However, our current interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your “voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.

We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held by that Subaccount for which we have received timely voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts of ours and our insurance affiliates. As a result of proportional voting, the votes cast by a small number of Contract Owners may determine the outcome of a vote.

We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws or regulations, or in their interpretation.

The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:


	•	your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to that Portfolio, divided by

	•	the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.

Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting interest.

After your Annuity Date, if you have selected a variable annuity, the voting rights under your Contract will continue during the payout period of your annuity, but the number of shares that form the basis for your voting interest, as described above, will decrease throughout the payout period.

Changes to Your Contract

Contract Owner(s)

Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax adviser before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership. If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or remove a Joint Owner. A Contract cannot name more than two Contract Owners at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including Joint Owners, must be under the age of 86 at the time of change or addition. The Contract Owner(s) may make all decisions regarding the Contract, including making allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both Owners.

If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 401 or 457(b), the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 408 and 403(b), you must be the sole Owner of the Contract and no changes can be made.

Annuitant and Contingent or Joint Annuitant

Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued. Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent Annuitants. See ANNUITIZATION – Selecting Your Annuitant. There may be limited exceptions for certain Qualified Contracts.

Beneficiaries

Your Beneficiary is the person(s) or entity who may receive death benefit proceeds under your Contract or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or Owner dies. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents, in proper form, at our Service Center and we record the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect any payment made or any other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded.

Spousal consent may be required to change the Beneficiary of an IRA. If you are considering removing a spouse as a Beneficiary, it is recommended that you consult your legal or tax advisor regarding any applicable state or federal laws prior to requesting the change. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require that Contracts issued under Code Sections 401 and 457(b) name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate will receive any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.

Changes to All Contracts

If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not expect that a Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions, tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.

Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract) with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment company or series of another investment company, or another investment vehicle. We may also purchase, through a Subaccount, other securities for other series or other classes of contracts, and may permit conversions or exchanges between series or classes of contracts on the basis of Contract Owner requests. Required approvals of the SEC and state insurance regulators will be obtained before any such substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any planned substitution.

We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A and any new Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of a Fund or in other investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion. We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators, to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do any of the following:


	•	cease offering any Subaccount;

	•	add or change designated investment companies or their portfolios, or other investment vehicles;

	•	add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any Variable Account;

	•	permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;


	•	add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;

	•	combine the assets of any Variable Account with any other of our separate accounts or of any of our affiliates;

	•	register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable Account under the 1940 Act;

	•	operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;

	•	run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee, board, or other group;

	•	restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights as to any Variable Account;

	•	make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal securities laws;

	•	make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the Contracts as annuities under the Code;

	•	make other changes required under federal or state law relating to annuities;

	•	suspend or discontinue sale of the Contracts; and

	•	comply with applicable law.

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

You may reach our service representatives at 1-800-722-4448 between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific time. Registered Representatives may call us at 1-800-722-2333.

Please send your forms and written requests or questions to:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 2378
Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378

If you are submitting a Purchase Payment or other payment by mail, please send it, along with your application if you are submitting one, to the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 2290
Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290

If you are using an overnight delivery service to send payments, please send them to the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
1299 Farnam Street, 6^th Floor, AMF

Omaha, Nebraska 68102

The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is determined by the date and time on which we “receive” the notice or instructions. We “receive” this information only when it arrives, in proper form, at the correct mailing address set out above. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Purchase Payment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Purchase Payment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. Please call us at 1-800-722-4448 if you have any questions regarding which address you should use. Registered Representatives may call us at 1-800-722-2333.

We reserve the right to process any Purchase Payment received at an incorrect address when it is received at either the address indicated in your Contract specification pages or the appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.

Purchase Payments after your initial Purchase Payment, loan requests, transfer requests, loan repayments and withdrawal requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day that we receive them in “proper form,” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or request, your instructions will be effective on the next Business Day after we receive them in “proper form” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. “Proper form” means in a form satisfactory to us and may require, among other things, a signature guarantee or other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be yours; or an executed application or confirmation of application, as applicable, in proper form is not received by us; or, to protect you or

us. Requests regarding death benefit proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and instructions regarding payment satisfactory to us. You should call your registered representative or us if you have questions regarding the required form of a request.

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as periods of substantial market fluctuations or other drastic economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us). Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day, and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or electronic transaction.

We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain personal identification upon our request. We may also record all or part of any telephone conversation with respect to transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are authorizing us to accept and to act upon instructions received by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract, and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures, neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners, each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic transaction requests.

Electronic Information Consent

Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide prospectuses, prospectus supplements, annual and semi-annual reports, quarterly statements and immediate confirmations, proxy solicitation, privacy notice and other notices and documentation in electronic format when available instead of receiving paper copies of these documents by U.S. mail. You may enroll in this service by so indicating on the application, via our Internet website, or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically. Not all contract documentation and notifications may be currently available in electronic format. You will continue to receive paper copies of any documents and notifications not available in electronic format by U.S. mail. In addition, you will continue to receive paper copies of annual statements if required by state or federal law. By enrolling in this service, you consent to receive in electronic format any documents added in the future. For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting to receive information electronically. Documents will be available on our Internet website. As documents become available, we will notify you of this by sending you an e-mail message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the document. You must have ready access to a computer with Internet access, an active e-mail account to receive this information electronically, and the ability to read and retain it. You may access and print all documents provided through this service.

If you plan on enrolling in this service, or are currently enrolled, please note that:


	•	We impose no additional charge for electronic delivery, although your Internet provider may charge for internet access.

	•	You must provide a current e-mail address and notify us promptly when your e-mail address changes.

	•	You must update any e-mail filters that may prevent you from receiving e-mail notifications from us.

	•	You may request a paper copy of the information at any time for no charge, even though you consented to electronic delivery, or if you decide to revoke your consent.

	•	For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting that the primary owner will receive information electronically. (Only the primary owner will receive e-mail notices.)

	•	Electronic delivery will be cancelled if e-mails are returned undeliverable.

	•	This consent will remain in effect until you revoke it.

We are not required to deliver this information electronically and may discontinue electronic delivery in whole or in part at any time. If you are currently enrolled in this service, please call (800) 722-4448 if you would like to revoke your consent, wish to receive a paper copy of the information above, or need to update your e-mail address.

Timing of Payments and Transactions

For withdrawals, including exchanges under Code Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the following day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a longer period under certain extraordinary circumstances. These include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC. Amounts withdrawn or transferred from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to six months after the request is effective. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT for more details.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Purchase Payments and transfers, loans, loan repayments, unscheduled partial withdrawals, a full withdrawal, optional living benefit rider Automatic or Owner Elected Resets/Step-Ups, and on payment of any death benefit proceeds. Periodically, we will send you a statement that provides certain information pertinent to your Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount values, any fixed option values, fees and charges applied to your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your transactions under the pre-authorized checking plan, dollar cost averaging, earnings sweep, portfolio rebalancing, and pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain annual information about your Contract Value and transactions. You may also access these statements online.

If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to ensure proper accounting to your Contract. When you write, tell us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected error. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.

You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account and the Funds and a list of the securities held in each Portfolio of the Funds, as required by the 1940 Act; or more frequently if required by law.

Contract Owner Mailings. To help reduce expenses, environmental waste and the volume of mail you receive, only one copy of Contract Owner documents (such as the prospectus, supplements, announcements, and each annual and semi-annual report) may be mailed to Contract Owners who share the same household address (Householding). If you are already participating, you may opt out by contacting us. Please allow 30 calendar days for regular delivery to resume. You may also elect to participate in Householding by writing to us. The current documents are available on our website any time or an individual copy of any of these documents may be requested – see the last page of this Prospectus for more information.

Distribution Arrangements

PSD, a broker-dealer and our subsidiary, pays various forms of sales compensation to broker-dealers (including other affiliates) that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD also may reimburse other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts.

We offer the Contracts for sale through broker-dealers that have entered into selling agreements with PSD. Broker-dealers sell the Contracts through their registered representatives. PSD pays compensation to broker-dealers for the promotion and sale of the Contracts. The individual registered representative who sells you a Contract typically will receive a portion of the compensation, under the representative’s own arrangement with his or her broker-dealer. Broker-dealers may receive aggregate commissions of up to 6.00% of your aggregate Purchase Payments. Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual) which will take into account, among other things, the Account Value and the length of time Purchase Payments have been held under a Contract. A trail commission is not anticipated to exceed 0.50%, on an annual basis, of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission. Certain broker-dealers may also be paid an amount under a persistency program which will be based on assets under management and duration of Contracts. The amount under the persistency program for a registered representative is not expected to exceed .25% of their total assets under management.

We may also provide compensation to broker-dealers for providing ongoing service in relation to Contracts that have already been purchased.

Additional Compensation and Revenue Sharing

To the extent permitted by SEC and FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, selling broker-dealers may receive additional payments in the form of cash, other special compensation or reimbursement of expenses, sometimes called “revenue sharing”. These additional compensation or reimbursement arrangements may include, for example, payments in connection with the firm’s “due

diligence” examination of the contracts, payments for providing conferences or seminars, sales or training programs for invited registered representatives and other employees, payments for travel expenses, including lodging, incurred by registered representatives and other employees for such seminars or training programs, seminars for the public, advertising and sales campaigns regarding the Contracts, and payments to assist a firm in connection with its administrative systems, operations and marketing expenses and/or other events or activities sponsored by the firms. Subject to applicable FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, PSD and its affiliates may contribute to, as well as sponsor, various educational programs, sales contests and/or promotions in which participating firms and their salespersons may receive prizes such as merchandise, cash, or other awards. Such additional compensation may give us greater access to registered representatives of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation or may otherwise influence the way that a broker-dealer and registered representative market the Contracts.

These arrangements may not be applicable to all firms, and the terms of such arrangements may differ between firms. We provide additional information on special compensation or reimbursement arrangements involving selling firms and other financial institutions in the Statement of Additional Information, which is available upon request. Any such compensation will not result in any additional direct charge to you by us.

The compensation and other benefits provided by PSD or its affiliates may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products. This may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options available in the marketplace. You may ask your registered representative about these differing and divergent interests, how he/she is personally compensated and how his/her broker-dealer is compensated for soliciting applications for the Contract.

Service Arrangements

We have entered into services agreements with certain Funds, or Fund affiliates, which pay us for administrative and other services, including, but not limited to, certain communications and support services. The fees are based on an annual percentage of average daily net assets of certain Fund portfolios purchased by us at Contract Owner’s instructions. Currently, the fees received do not exceed an annual percentage of 0.30% and each Fund (or Fund affiliate) may not pay the same annual percentage (some may pay significantly less). Because we receive such fees, we may be subject to competing interests in making these Funds available as Investment Options under the Contracts.

AllianceBernstein Investments, Inc. pays us for each AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. portfolio (Class B) held by our separate accounts. BlackRock Distributors, Inc. pays us for each BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. portfolio (Class III) held by our separate accounts. Franklin Templeton Services, LLC pays us for each Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust portfolio (Class 4) held by our separate accounts. Invesco Aim Advisors, Inc. and its affiliates pay us for each AIM Variable Insurance Funds portfolio (Series II) held by our separate accounts. Van Kampen Funds Inc. pays us for each Van Kampen Life Investment Trust portfolio (Class II) held by our separate accounts.

PSD shall pay American Funds Distributors, Inc. at a rate of 0.16% of Purchase Payments up to $1.5 billion, 0.14% on Purchase Payments on next $1.5 billion and 0.10% on Purchase Payments made in excess, attributable to the Master Funds for certain marketing assistance.

Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities

The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the life insurance industry and is described more fully below. Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of insurance.

A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited, assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through withdrawal, surrender or loan.

There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest. Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is in your best interest.

State Considerations

Certain Contract features described in this Prospectus may vary or may not be available in your state. The state in which your Contract is issued governs whether or not certain features, Riders, charges or fees are available or will vary under your Contract. These variations are reflected in your Contract and in Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. See your Registered Representative or contact us for specific information that may be applicable to your state.

For Contracts issued in the state of Pennsylvania, any person who knowingly and with intent to defraud any insurance company or other person files an application for insurance or statement of claim containing any materially false information or conceals for the purpose of

misleading, information concerning any fact material thereto commits a fraudulent insurance act, which is a crime and subjects such person to criminal and civil penalties.

In addition, you understand that benefits and values provided under the Contract may be on a variable basis. Amounts directed into one or more variable Investment Options will reflect the investment experience of those Investment Options. These amounts may increase or decrease and are not guaranteed as to a dollar amount.

California Applicants Age 60 or Older

For residents of the state of California 60 years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract. If you are a California applicant age 60 or older and your Contract is delivered or issued for delivery on or after July 1, 2004, you must elect, at the time you apply for your Contract, to receive a return of either your Purchase Payments or your Contract Value proceeds if you exercise your Right to Cancel and return your Contract to us.

If you elect to receive the return of Purchase Payments option, the following will apply:


	•	We will allocate all or any portion of any Net Purchase Payment we receive to any available fixed option if you instruct us to do so. We will allocate all or any portion of any Net Purchase Payment designated for any Variable Investment Option to the Money Market Subaccount until the Free Look Transfer Date. The Free Look Transfer Date is 30 days from the Contract Date. On the Free Look Transfer Date, we will automatically transfer your Money Market Subaccount Value according to the instructions on your application, or your most recent instruction, if any. This automatic transfer to the Variable Investment Options according to your initial allocation instruction is excluded from the Transfer limitations. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

	•	If you specifically instruct us to allocate all or any portion of any additional Net Purchase Payments we receive to any Variable Investment Option other than the Money Market Subaccount before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.

	•	If you request a transfer of all or any portion of your Contract Value from the Money Market Subaccount to any other Variable Investment Option before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.

	•	If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Purchase Payments.

If you elect the return of Contract Value proceeds option, the following will apply:


	•	We will immediately allocate any Net Purchase Payments we receive to the Investment Options you select on your application or your most recent instructions, if any.

	•	If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Contract Value proceeds described in the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section of this prospectus.

	•	Once you elect this option, it may not be changed.

Financial Statements

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2008, the related statements of operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods presented and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2008. Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2008 and 2007 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2008 are contained in the Statement of Additional Information.

THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

General Information

All amounts allocated to a fixed option become part of our General Account. Subject to applicable law, we exercise sole discretion over the investment of General Account assets, and bear the associated investment risk. You will not share in the investment experience of General Account assets. Unlike the Separate Account, the General Account is subject to liabilities arising from any of our other business. Any guarantees provided for under the contract or through optional riders are backed by our financial strength and claims paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees.

Because of exemptive and exclusionary provisions, interests in the General Account under the Contract are not registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the General Account has not been registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Any

interest you have in a fixed option is not subject to these Acts, and we have been advised that the SEC staff has not reviewed disclosure in this Prospectus relating to any fixed option. This disclosure may, however, be subject to certain provisions of federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses.

Guarantee Terms

When you allocate any portion of your Net Purchase Payments or Contract Value to any fixed option, we guarantee you an interest rate (a “Guaranteed Interest Rate”) for a specified period of time (a “Guarantee Term”) of up to one year. Guarantee Terms will be offered at our discretion.

Guaranteed Interest Rates for any fixed option may be changed periodically for new allocations. Your allocation will receive the Guaranteed Interest Rate in effect for that fixed option on the effective date of your allocation. All Guaranteed Interest Rates will be expressed as annual effective rates, however, interest will accrue daily. The Guaranteed Interest Rate on your fixed option will remain in effect for the Guarantee Term and will never be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Withdrawals and Transfers

Prior to the Annuity Date, you may withdraw or transfer amounts from any fixed option to one or more of the other Variable Investment Options. No partial withdrawal or transfer may be made from a fixed option within 30 days of the Contract Date. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers, but we reserve the right to require the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers in the future. If your withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

Amounts transferred or withdrawn from any fixed option may be delayed, as described under ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – Timing of Payments and Transactions. Any amount delayed, so long as it is held under any fixed option, will continue to earn interest at the Guaranteed Interest Rate then in effect until that Guarantee Term has ended, and the minimum guaranteed interest rate of 3% thereafter, unless state law requires a greater rate be paid.

DCA Plus Fixed Option

Before your Annuity Date, you can allocate all or some of your Net Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum amount you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. You may not transfer any amount to the DCA Plus Fixed Option from any other Investment Option. All Net Purchase Payments allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will earn interest at the then current Guaranteed Interest Rate declared by us.

The DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on any Business Day is the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions to the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any:


	•	interest, plus

	•	Net Purchase Payments allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, plus

	•	any additional amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option,

and decreased by any deductions from the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any;


	•	transfers, including transfers to the Loan Account,

	•	withdrawals,

	•	amounts applied to provide an annuity, and

	•	charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes and annual fees.

The DCA Plus program will automatically terminate at the end of your DCA Plus Guarantee Term, or upon the earliest of:


	•	the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,

	•	the date you transfer the entire amount from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to another Investment Option,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

At the end of the DCA Plus program, upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment that satisfies our minimum allocation requirements, you may request, in a form satisfactory to us, a new DCA Plus program.

We reserve the right to change the terms and conditions of the DCA Plus program, but not a DCA Plus program you already have in effect.

Guarantee Terms

The day that the first Net Purchase Payment allocation is made to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will begin the Guarantee Term. You can choose a Guarantee Term of up to one year. Currently, we offer Guarantee Terms of 6 or 12 months with monthly transfers on the same day of each month thereafter to the Variable Investment Options that you selected. The amount transferred each month is equal to your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on that day divided by the remaining number of monthly transfers in the Guarantee Term.

Example: On May 1, a Net Purchase Payment of $10,000 is allocated entirely to the DCA Plus Fixed Option at a then current Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5.00% with a Guarantee Term of 6 months. On June 1, the value of the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $10,041.52. On June 1, a transfer equal to $1,673.59 (10,041.52/6) will be made according to your DCA Plus transfer instructions. Your remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value after the transfer is $8,367.93. On July 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option has now increased to $8,401.56. We will transfer $1,680.31 ($8,401.56/5) to the Variable Investment Options, leaving a remaining value of $6,721.25 in the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

During the Guarantee Term, you can allocate all or a part of any additional Net Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. Additional allocations must be at least $250. Each additional allocation will be transferred to the Variable Investment Options you select over the remaining Guarantee Term. Transfers will be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value attributed to the oldest Investment allocation and each subsequent Net Purchase Payment in the order received.

Example: (using the previous example): On July 15, an additional $5,000 Net Purchase Payment is allocated to the DCA Plus Option at a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 4.00%. On August 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value has increased to $11,758.30. An amount equal to $2,939.58 ($11,758.30/4) is transferred from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the Variable Investment Options. The remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value is $8,818.72.

Transfers

DCA Plus transfers must be made on a monthly basis to the Variable Investment Options. No transfers to the DCA Plus Fixed Option may be made at any time. You cannot choose to transfer other than monthly. Unless otherwise instructed, any additional Net Purchase Payment we receive during a Guarantee Term will be allocated to the Investment Options, including the DCA Plus Fixed Option if so indicated, according to your most recent allocation instructions.

If the Owner dies while transfers are being made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, transfers will continue to be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the selected Variable Investment Options, until the Guarantee Term ends.

TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS

Some of the terms we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you. We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the first letter of each word. You will find an explanation of what they mean below.

If you have any questions, please ask your registered representative or call us at 1-800-722-4448. Registered Representatives may call us at 1-800-722-2333.

Account Value – The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified Variable Investment Option or any fixed option.

Annual Fee – A $30 fee charged each year on your Contract Anniversary and at the time of a full withdrawal, if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date.

Annuitant – A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date. A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two (“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a “Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.

Annuity Date – The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Option – Any one of the income options available for a series of payments after your Annuity Date.

Beneficiary – A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant dies after the Annuity Date.

Business Day – Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading and our administrative offices are open. The New York Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, and the Friday before New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly accounting period. In this Prospectus, “day” or “date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified. If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than 31 days are discussed in the SAI.

Code – The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Contingent Annuitant – A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant (or both Joint Annuitants) should die before your Annuity Date.

Contract Anniversary – The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.

Contract Date – The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from this date.

Contract Debt – As of the end of any given Business Day, the principal amount you have outstanding on any loan under your Contract, plus any accrued and unpaid interest. Loans are only available on certain Qualified Contracts.

Contract Owner, Owner, Policyholder, you, or your – Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract, including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such rights.

Contract Value – As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable Account Value, any fixed option value, the value of any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement, and any Loan Account Value.

Contract Year – A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract Anniversary.

DCA Plus Fixed Option – If you allocate all or part of your Net Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”), but not less than an annual rate of 3%.

DCA Plus Fixed Option Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Earnings – As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your Contract Value less your aggregate Purchase Payments, which are reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.

Fund – Pacific Select Fund, AIM Variable Insurance Funds, AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc., BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc., Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, GE Investments Funds, and/or Van Kampen Life Investment Trust.

General Account – Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

Guarantee Term – The period during which an amount you allocate to any available fixed option earns interest at a Guaranteed Interest Rate. These terms are up to one-year for a fixed option.

Guaranteed Interest Rate – The interest rate guaranteed at the time of allocation (or rollover) for the Guarantee Term on amounts allocated to a fixed option. All Guaranteed Interest Rates are expressed as annual rates and interest is accrued daily. The rate will not be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Investment (“Purchase Payment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract before a sales charge is deducted.

Investment Option – A Subaccount, any fixed option or any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement.

Joint Annuitant – If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your application for your Contract. Special restrictions apply for Qualified Contracts.

Loan Account – The Account in which the amount equal to the principal amount of a loan and any interest accrued is held to secure any Contract Debt.

Loan Account Value – The amount, including any interest accrued, held in the Loan Account to secure any Contract Debt.

Net Contract Value – Your Contract Value less Contract Debt.

Net Purchase Payment – A Purchase Payment less a sales charge. This is the amount that is allocated to the Investment Options you select..

Non-Natural Owner – A corporation, trust or other entity that is not a (natural) person.

Non-Qualified Contract – A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.

Policyholder – The Contract Owner.

Portfolio – A separate portfolio of a Fund in which a Subaccount invests its assets.

Primary Annuitant – The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment (“Investment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract before a sales charge is deducted.

Qualified Contract – A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof, or a Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan – A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401, 403, or 457 of the Code.

SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.

Separate Account A (the “Separate Account”) – A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

Subaccount – An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.

Subaccount Annuity Unit – Subaccount Annuity Units (or “Annuity Units”) are used to measure variation in variable annuity payments. To the extent you elect to convert all or some of your Contract Value into variable annuity payments, the amount of each annuity payment (after the first payment) will vary with the value and number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount attributed to any variable annuity payments. At annuitization (after any applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes are paid), the amount annuitized to a variable annuity determines the amount of your first variable annuity payment and the number of Annuity Units credited to your annuity in each Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Annuity Units, like the value of Subaccount Units, is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Subaccount Unit – Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Unit Value – The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit Value”) or Subaccount Annuity Unit (“Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against the Separate Account. Changes in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values also reflect an additional factor that adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to offset our Annuity Option Table’s implicit assumption of an annual investment return of 5%. The effect of this assumed investment return is explained in detail in the SAI. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit or Subaccount Annuity Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally closes earlier.

Variable Account Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all Subaccounts.

Variable Investment Option – A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account).

CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION


PERFORMANCE
Total Returns
Yields
Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks
Power of Tax Deferral

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT
Calculating Subaccount Unit Values
Variable Annuity Payment Amounts
Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Options 2 and 4
Corresponding Dates
Age and Sex of Annuitant
Systematic Transfer Programs
Pre-Authorized Withdrawals
Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts
More on Federal Tax Issues
Safekeeping of Assets

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS


To receive a current copy of the Pacific Destinations SAI without charge, call (800) 722-4448. Registered Representatives may call us at (800) 722-2333. You may also complete the following and send it to:


Pacific Life Insurance Company Post Office Box 2378 Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378


Name


Address


City	State	Zip



PH02/53003.29

APPENDIX A:

AUTOMATIC INCOME BUILDER RIDER

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68

Beginning

Protected

Remaining

of Contract

Purchase

Contract Value

Payment

Protected

Year

Payment

Withdrawal

after Activity

Base

Amount

Balance

$100,000

$96,500

$100,000

$4,000

$100,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = Withdrawal percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base = 4% × $100,000 = $4,000
	•	Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment less sales charge = $96,500

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payments.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Years 1 and 2.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.



Beginning				Protected	Protected	Remaining
of Contract	Purchase		Contract Value	Payment	Payment	Protected
Year	Payment	Withdrawal	after Activity	Base	Amount	Balance


1	$100,000		$96,500	$100,000	$4,000	$100,000
Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000	$200,000
2	Prior to Automatic Reset		$207,000	$200,000	$8,200	$200,000
2	After Automatic Reset		$207,000	$207,000	$8,487	$207,000
Activity	$100,000		$307,000	$307,000	$12,587	$307,000
3	Prior to Automatic Reset		$321,490	$307,000	$15,964	$307,000
3	After Automatic Reset		$321,490	$321,490	$16,717	$321,490

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $8,000 (4.0% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the Beginning of Contract Year 2, the withdrawal percentage is increased to 4.1%. Additionally, because at the Beginning of Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 2 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see

balances at Beginning of Contract Year 2 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $8,487 (4.1% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $307,000 ($207,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $12,587 (4.1% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

At the Beginning of Contract Year 3, the withdrawal percentage is increased to 5.2%. The withdrawal percentage increased from 4.1% to 5.2% because during Contract Year 2 there were no withdrawals (0.10% added to the withdrawal percentage) and the Owner reached age 70 (1.0% added to the withdrawal percentage). Additionally, because at the Beginning of Contract Year 3, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 3 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 3 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $16,717 (5.2% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

Example #3 – Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Years 1 and 2.
	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 3.
	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.



Beginning				Protected	Protected	Remaining
of Contract	Purchase		Contract Value	Payment	Payment	Protected
Year	Payment	Withdrawal	after Activity	Base	Amount	Balance


1	$100,000		$96,500	$100,000	$4,000	$100,000
Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000	$200,000
2	Prior to Automatic Reset		$207,000	$200,000	$8,200	$200,000
2	After Automatic Reset		$207,000	$207,000	$8,487	$207,000
Activity	$100,000		$307,000	$307,000	$12,587	$307,000
3	Prior to Automatic Reset		$321,490	$307,000	$15,964	$307,000
3	After Automatic Reset		$321,490	$321,490	$16,717	$321,490
Activity		$16,717	$327,277	$321,490	$0	$304,773
4	Prior to Automatic Reset		$327,277	$321,490	$16,717	$304,773
4	After Automatic Reset		$327,277	$327,277	$17,018	$327,277

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Years 1 and 2, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

At the Beginning of Contract Year 3, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 3 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 3 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $16,717 (5.2% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($16,717):

(a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and

(b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $304,773 ($321,490 − $16,717).

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 3, the withdrawal percentage will no longer increase as a result of delaying withdrawals.

Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 4, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year 4 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of

Contract Year 4 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $17,018 (5.2% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #4 – Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Years 1 and 2.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 3.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.



Beginning			Contract	Protected	Protected	Remaining
of Contract	Purchase		Value	Payment	Payment	Protected
Year	Payment	Withdrawal	after Activity	Base	Amount	Balance


1	$100,000		$96,500	$100,000	$4,000	$100,000
Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000	$200,000
2	Prior to Automatic Reset		$207,000	$200,000	$8,200	$200,000
2	After Automatic Reset		$207,000	$207,000	$8,487	$207,000
Activity	$100,000		$307,000	$307,000	$12,587	$307,000
3	Prior to Automatic Reset		$321,490	$307,000	$15,964	$307,000
3	After Automatic Reset		$321,490	$321,490	$16,717	$321,490
Activity		$30,000	$313,994	$308,437	$0	$291,490
4	Prior to Automatic Reset		$313,994	$308,437	$16,038	$291,490
4	After Automatic Reset		$313,994	$313,994	$16,327	$313,994

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Years 1 and 2, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($16,717), the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $308,437 and the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to $291,490. The reduction in the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance is calculated as follows:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $13,283 (Total withdrawal amount – Protected Payment Amount; $30,000 − $16,717 = $13,283).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value prior to the withdrawal – Protected Payment Amount). Numerically, the ratio is 4.06% ($13,283 ¸ ($343,994 − $16,717); $13,283 ¸ $327,277 = 0.0406 or 4.06%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $308,437 (Protected Payment Base × (1-ratio); $321,490 × (1-4.06%); $321,490 × 95.94% = $308,437).

Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount and then multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is $292,399 (Remaining Protected Balance – Protected Payment Amount) × (1-ratio); ($321,490 − $16,717) × (1-4.06%); $304,773 × 95.94% = $292,399).

To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected Balance is $291,490 (Remaining Protected Balance – total withdrawal amount; $321,490 − $30,000 = $291,490).

Therefore, since $291,490 (total withdrawal amount method) is less than $292,399 (proportionate method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $291,490.

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 3, the withdrawal percentage will no longer increase as a result of delaying withdrawals.

Example #5 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract Anniversary is May 1 of each year.



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006 Contract Anniversary			$0	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000
01/01/2007			$7,500
03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$98,125
05/01/2007 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$5,000	$98,125
06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$96,250
09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250	$94,375
12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0	$92,500
01/01/2008			$8,000
03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0	$90,500
05/01/2008 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$5,000	$90,500

Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.

This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are the same as above.



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006 Contract Anniversary			$0	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000
01/01/2007			$7,500
03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$98,125
04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$1,125	$96,125
05/01/2007 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$5,000	$96,125
06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$94,250
09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250	$92,375
11/15/2007		$4,000		$96,900	$0	$88,300

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to $88,300.

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $2,750 (Total withdrawal amount – Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value – Protected Payment Amount). Numerically, the ratio is 3.10% ($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250); $2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,900 (Protected Payment Base x (1-ratio); $100,000 × (1-3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount and then multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is $88,300 (Remaining Protected Balance – Protected Payment Amount) x (1-ratio); ($92,375 − $1,250) × (1-3.10%); $91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).

To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance – total withdrawal amount; $92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).

Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than $88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $88,300.

Example #6 – Lifetime Income.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 65
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, are taken each Contract Year:


	•	Equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base in Contract Years 1-5 (age 65-69)
	•	Equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base in Contract Years 6-20 (age 70-84)
	•	Equal to 6% of the Protected Payment Base in Contract Years 21-35 (age 85-99)


	•	No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.



			Protected	Protected	Remaining
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment	Protected
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount	Balance


1	$4,000	$99,000	$100,000	$4,000	$96,000
2	$4,000	$97,970	$100,000	$4,000	$92,000
3	$4,000	$96,909	$100,000	$4,000	$88,000
4	$4,000	$95,816	$100,000	$4,000	$84,000
5	$4,000	$94,691	$100,000	$4,000	$80,000
6	$5,000	$92,532	$100,000	$5,000	$75,000
7	$5,000	$90,308	$100,000	$5,000	$70,000
8	$5,000	$88,017	$100,000	$5,000	$65,000
9	$5,000	$85,657	$100,000	$5,000	$60,000
10	$5,000	$83,227	$100,000	$5,000	$55,000
11	$5,000	$80,724	$100,000	$5,000	$50,000
12	$5,000	$78,146	$100,000	$5,000	$45,000
13	$5,000	$75,490	$100,000	$5,000	$40,000
14	$5,000	$72,755	$100,000	$5,000	$35,000
15	$5,000	$69,937	$100,000	$5,000	$30,000
16	$5,000	$67,035	$100,000	$5,000	$25,000
17	$5,000	$64,046	$100,000	$5,000	$20,000
18	$5,000	$60,968	$100,000	$5,000	$15,000
19	$5,000	$57,797	$100,000	$5,000	$10,000
20	$5,000	$54,531	$100,000	$5,000	$5,000
21	$6,000	$50,167	$100,000	$6,000	$0
22	$6,000	$45,672	$100,000	$6,000	$0
23	$6,000	$41,042	$100,000	$6,000	$0
24	$6,000	$36,273	$100,000	$6,000	$0
25	$6,000	$31,361	$100,000	$6,000	$0
26	$6,000	$26,302	$100,000	$6,000	$0
27	$6,000	$21,091	$100,000	$6,000	$0
28	$6,000	$15,724	$100,000	$6,000	$0
29	$6,000	$10,196	$100,000	$6,000	$0
30	$6,000	$4,501	$100,000	$6,000	$0
31	$6,000	$0	$100,000	$6,000	$0
32	$6,000	$0	$100,000	$6,000	$0
33	$6,000	$0	$100,000	$6,000	$0
34	$6,000	$0	$100,000	$6,000	$0
35	$6,000	$0	$100,000	$6,000	$0

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment Base = $4,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal: (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal.

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no increases are added to the withdrawal percentage due to delaying withdrawals.

Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 4%, 5% and 6% of the Protected Payment Base, respectively, will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first.

APPENDIX B:

DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT RIDER (SDBR) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. They have been provided to assist in understanding the death benefit amount under the Contract and the optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the Contract may effect the values and benefits. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to reflect what your actual death benefit proceeds will be or serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

Death Benefit Amount

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.
	•	A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.



Beginning	Purchase			Return of
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal		Purchase
Year	Received	Amount	Contract Value	Payments


1	$100,000		$96,500	$100,000
2			$103,000	$100,000
3			$106,090	$100,000
Activity	$25,000		$133,468	$125,000
4			$134,458	$125,000
5			$138,492	$125,000
6			$142,647	$125,000
Activity		$35,000	$110,844	$95,002
7			$111,666	$95,002
8			$103,850	$95,002
9			$96,580	$95,002
10 Death Occurs			$89,820	$95,002

On the Rider effective date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment less sales charge = $96,500

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. The Return of Purchase Payment death benefit increased to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment death benefit on a pro rata basis to $95,002 and decreased the Contract Value. Numerically, the new Death Benefit Amount is calculated as follows: Death Benefit Amount × (withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal); $125,000 × ($35,000 ¸ $145,844) = $95,002.

During Contract Year 10, death occurs. The death benefit amount will be the Return of Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal ($95,002) because that amount is greater than the Contract Value.

Using the table above, if death occurred in Contract Year 7, the death benefit amount would be the Contract Value ($111,666) because that amount is greater than the Return of Purchase Payment (reduced by an amount for withdrawals) of $95,002.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.
	•	A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.
	•	Annual Step-Ups occur on each of the first seven Contract Anniversaries.



					Guaranteed
					Minimum
Beginning	Purchase			Return of	(Stepped-Up)
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal	Contract	Purchase	Death Benefit
Year	Received	Amount	Value¹	Payments¹	Amount


1	$100,000		$96,500	$100,000	$100,000
2			$103,000	$100,000	$103,000
3			$106,090	$100,000	$106,090
Activity	$25,000		$133,468	$125,000	$131,090
4			$134,458	$125,000	$134,458
5			$138,492	$125,000	$138,492
6			$142,647	$125,000	$142,647
Activity		$35,000	$110,844	$95,002	$108,414
7			$111,666	$95,002	$111,666
8			$103,850	$95,002	$111,666
9			$96,580	$95,002	$111,666
Death Occurs			$89,820	$95,002	$111,666


¹	The greater of the Contract Value or the adjusted Return of Purchase Payments represents the Death Benefit Amount.

On the Rider effective date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment less sales charge = $96,500

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. This results in an increase in the Return of Purchase Payment death benefit amount to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payments death benefit on a pro rata basis to $95,002 and decreased the Contract Value. In addition, the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount was reduced on a pro rata basis to $108,414. Numerically, the new Death Benefit Amount is calculated as follows: Death Benefit Amount × (withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal); $125,000 × ($35,000 ¸ $145,844) = $95,002. The new Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount is calculated as follows: Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount × (withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal); $142,647 × ($35,000 ¸ $145,844) = $108,414.

During Contract Year 9, death occurs. The death benefit proceeds are the greater of the Death Benefit Amount (Contract Value or Return of Purchase Payments adjusted for withdrawals) or the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount. The death benefit proceeds are equal to the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount of $111,666 because it is greater than the Death Benefit Amount (Return of Purchase Payments of $95,002).


PACIFIC DESTINATIONS		WHERE TO GO FOR MORE INFORMATION


The Pacific Destinations variable annuity Contract is offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company, 700 Newport Center Drive. P.O. Box 9000, Newport Beach, California 92660. If you have any questions about the Contract, please ask your registered representative or contact us.		You will find more information about the Pacific Destinations variable annuity contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated [ ]. The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it is incorporated by reference. In this Prospectus, you will find the table of contents for the SAI on page 61. You can get a copy of the SAI at no charge by calling or writing to us, or by contacting the SEC. The SEC may charge you a fee for this information.


How to Contact Us		Call or write to us at: Pacific Life Insurance Company P.O. Box 2378 Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378 Contract Owners: 1-800-722-4448 Registered Representatives: 1-800-722-2333 6 a.m. through 5 p.m. Pacific time Send Purchase Payments, other payments and application forms to the following address: By mail Pacific Life Insurance Company P.O. Box 2290 Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290 By overnight delivery service Pacific Life Insurance Company1299 Farnam Street, 6^th Floor, AMF Omaha, Nebraska 68102


How to Contact the SEC		Commission’s Public Reference Section 100 F Street, NE Washington, D.C. 20549 1-202-551-8090 Website: www.sec.gov e-mail: publicinfo@sec.gov


FINRA Public Disclosure Program		The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) provides investor protection education through its website and printed materials. The FINRA regulation website address is www.finra.org. An investor brochure that includes information describing the Public Disclosure program may be obtained from FINRA. The FINRA Public Disclosure hotline number is (800) 289-9999. FINRA does not charge a fee for the Public Disclosure program services.

PERFORMANCE

From time to time, our reports or other communications to current or prospective Contract Owners or our advertising or other promotional material may quote the performance (yield and total return) of a Subaccount. Quoted results are based on past performance and reflect the performance of all assets held in that Subaccount for the stated time period. Quoted results are neither an estimate nor a guarantee of future investment performance, and do not represent the actual experience of amounts invested by any particular Contract Owner.

Total Returns

A Subaccount may advertise its “average annual total return” over various periods of time. “Total return” represents the average percentage change in value of an investment in the Subaccount from the beginning of a measuring period to the end of that measuring period. “Annualized” total return assumes that the total return achieved for the measuring period is achieved for each such period for a full year. “Average annual” total return is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC, and is also referred to as “standardized return.”

Average Annual Total Return

To calculate a Subaccount’s average annual total return for a specific measuring period, we first take a hypothetical $1,000 investment in that Subaccount, at its then-applicable Subaccount Unit Value (the “initial payment”) and we compute the ending redeemable value of that initial payment at the end of the measuring period based on the investment experience of that Subaccount (“full withdrawal value”). The full withdrawal value reflects the effect of all recurring fees and charges applicable to a Contract Owner under the Contract, including the Risk Charge and the asset-based Administrative Fee, but does not reflect any charges for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any optional Rider charge, any non-recurring fees or charges, or any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider. The Annual Fee is also taken into account, assuming an average Contract Value of $45.000. The redeemable value is then divided by the initial payment and this quotient is raised to the 365/N power (N represents the number of days in the measuring period), and 1 is subtracted from this result. Average annual total return is expressed as a percentage.

T = (ERV/P)^(365/N) − 1


where	T	=	average annual total return
	ERV	=	ending redeemable value
	P	=	hypothetical initial payment of $1,000
	N	=	number of days

Average annual total return figures will be given for recent 1-, 3-, 5- and 10-year periods (if applicable), and may be given for other periods as well (such as from commencement of the Subaccount’s operations, or on a year-by-year basis).

When considering “average” total return figures for periods longer than one year, it is important to note that the relevant Subaccount’s annual total return for any one year in the period might have been greater or less than the average for the entire period.

Aggregate Total Return

A Subaccount may use “aggregate” total return figures along with its “average annual” total return figures for various periods; these figures represent the cumulative change in value of an investment in the Subaccount for a specific period. Aggregate total returns may be shown by means of schedules, charts or graphs and may indicate subtotals of the various components of total return. The SEC has not prescribed standard formulas for calculating aggregate total return.

Total returns may also be shown for the same periods that do not take into account the Annual Fee.

Non-Standardized Total Returns

We may also calculate non-standardized total returns which may or may not reflect any Annual Fee, any increases in Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, charges for premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any charge for an optional Rider, and any non-recurring fees or charge.

Standardized return figures will always accompany any non-standardized returns shown.

Yields

Money Market Subaccount

The “yield” (also called “current yield”) of the Money Market Subaccount is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net change in the Subaccount’s Unit Value during a seven-day period is divided by the Unit Value at the beginning of the period to obtain a base rate of return. The current yield is generated when the base rate is “annualized” by multiplying it by the fraction 365/7; that is, the base rate of return is assumed to be generated each week over a 365-day period and is shown as a percentage of the investment. The “effective yield” of the Money Market Subaccount is calculated similarly but, when annualized, the base rate of return is assumed to be reinvested. The effective yield will be slightly higher than the current yield because of the compounding effect of this assumed reinvestment.

The formula for effective yield is: [(Base Period Return + 1) (To the power of 365/7)] − 1.

Realized capital gains or losses and unrealized appreciation or depreciation of the assets of the underlying Money Market Portfolio are not included in the yield calculation. Current yield and effective yield do not reflect the deduction of charges for any applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, any charges for an optional Rider or any non-recurring fees or charges, but do reflect a deduction for the Annual Fee, the Risk Charge, and the asset-based Administrative Fee and assume an average Contract Value of $45,000.

Other Subaccounts

“Yield” of the other Subaccounts is computed in accordance with a different standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net investment income (investment income less expenses) per Subaccount Unit earned during a specified one-month or 30-day period is divided by the Subaccount Unit Value on the last day of the specified period. This result is then annualized (that is, the yield is assumed to be generated each month or each 30-day period for a year), according to the following formula, which assumes semi-annual compounding:


YIELD = 2[(		a – b cd		+ 1)⁶ − 1]


where:	a	=	net investment income earned during the period by the Portfolio attributable to the Subaccount.
	b	=	expenses accrued for the period (net of reimbursements).
	c	=	the average daily number of Subaccount Units outstanding during the period that were entitled to receive dividends.
	d	=	the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units on the last day of the period.

The yield of each Subaccount reflects the deduction of all recurring fees and charges applicable to the Subaccount, such as the Risk Charge, the asset-based Administrative Fee and the Annual Fee (assuming an average Contract Value of $45,000), but does not reflect any charge for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, any charges for an optional Rider, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

The Subaccounts’ yields will vary from time to time depending upon market conditions, the composition of each Portfolio and operating expenses of the Fund allocated to each Portfolio. Consequently, any given performance quotation should not be considered representative of the Subaccount’s performance in the future. Yield should also be considered relative to changes in Subaccount Unit Values and to the relative risks associated with the investment policies and objectives of the various Portfolios. In addition, because performance will fluctuate, it may not provide a

basis for comparing the yield of a Subaccount with certain bank deposits or other investments that pay a fixed yield or return for a stated period of time.

Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks

In advertisements and sales literature, we may compare the performance of some or all of the Subaccounts to the performance of other variable annuity issuers in general and to the performance of particular types of variable annuities investing in mutual funds, or series of mutual funds, with investment objectives similar to each of the Subaccounts. This performance may be presented as averages or rankings compiled by Lipper Analytical Services, Inc. (“Lipper”), or Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”), which are independent services that monitor and rank the performance of variable annuity issuers and mutual funds in each of the major categories of investment objectives on an industry-wide basis. Lipper’s rankings include variable life issuers as well as variable annuity issuers. The performance analyses prepared by Lipper and Morningstar rank such issuers on the basis of total return, assuming reinvestment of dividends and distributions, but do not take sales charges, redemption fees or certain expense deductions at the separate account level into consideration. In addition, Morningstar prepares risk adjusted rankings, which consider the effects of market risk on total return performance. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with performance information included in other publications and services that monitor the performance of insurance company separate accounts or other investment vehicles. These other services or publications may be general interest business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Barron’s, Business Week, Forbes, Fortune, and Money.

In addition, our reports and communications to Contract Owners, advertisements, or sales literature may compare a Subaccount’s performance to various benchmarks that measure the performance of a pertinent group of securities widely regarded by investors as being representative of the securities markets in general or as being representative of a particular type of security. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with that of other appropriate indices of investment securities and averages for peer universes of funds or data developed by us derived from such indices or averages. Unmanaged indices generally assume the reinvestment of dividends or interest but do not generally reflect deductions for investment management or administrative costs and expenses.

Tax Deferred Accumulation

In reports or other communications to you or in advertising or sales materials, we may also describe the effects of tax-deferred compounding on the Separate Account’s investment returns or upon returns in general. These effects may be illustrated in charts or graphs and may include comparisons at various points in time of returns under the Contract or in general on a tax-deferred basis with the returns on a taxable basis. Different tax rates may be assumed.

In general, individuals who own annuity contracts are not taxed on increases in the value under the annuity contract until some form of distribution is made from the contract. Thus, the annuity contract will benefit from tax deferral during the accumulation period, which generally will have the effect of permitting an investment in an annuity contract to grow more rapidly than a comparable investment under which increases in value are taxed on a current basis. The following chart illustrates this benefit by comparing accumulation under a variable annuity contract with accumulations from an investment on which gains are taxed on a current ordinary income basis.

The chart shows accumulations on an single Net Purchase Payment of $10,000, assuming hypothetical annual returns of 0%, 4% and 8%, compounded annually, and a tax rate of 33%. The values shown for the taxable investment do not include any deduction for management fees or other expenses but assume that taxes are deducted annually from investment returns. The values shown for the variable annuity do not reflect the deduction of contractual expenses such as the Risk Charge (equal to an annual rate of 0.60% of average daily account value), the Administrative Fee (equal to an annual rate of 0.15% of average daily account value), the Annual Fee (equal to $30 per year if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000), any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider (equal to a maximum annual rate of 0.20% of average daily Account Value), other optional Rider charges (equal to a maximum annual rate of 1.75% of average daily account value), a charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, or the expenses of an underlying investment vehicle, such as the Fund.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc., our subsidiary, acts as the distributor of the Contracts and offers the Contracts on a continuous basis. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. PSD is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC and is a member of FINRA. We pay PSD for acting as distributor under a Distribution Agreement. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers whose registered representatives are authorized by state insurance departments to solicit applications for the Contracts. Because the Contract was not offered before 2009, PSD was not paid any underwriting commissions with regard to this Contract.

PSD or an affiliate pays various sales compensation to broker-dealers that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD or an affiliate also may provide reimbursement for other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Your registered representative typically receives a portion of the compensation that is payable to his or her broker-dealer in connection with the Contract, depending on the agreement between your registered representative and his or her firm. Pacific Life is not involved in determining that compensation arrangement, which may present its own incentives or conflicts. You may ask your registered representative how he/she will personally be compensated for the transaction.

Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual). The mix of Purchase Payment-based versus trail commissions varies depending upon our agreement with the selling broker-dealer and the commission option selected by your registered representative or broker-dealer. Certain broker-dealers may also be paid an amount under a persistency program which will be based on assets under management and duration of contracts. The amount under the persistency program for a registered representative is not expected to exceed .25% of their total assets under management.

In addition to the Purchase Payment-based, trail commissions and persistency program described above, we and/or an affiliate may pay additional cash compensation from our own resources in connection with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts by some, but not all, broker-dealers. The range of additional cash compensation based on Purchase Payments generally does not exceed 0.40% and trailing compensation based on Account Value generally does not exceed 0.10% on an annual basis. Such additional compensation may give Pacific Life greater access to registered representatives of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation. While this greater access provides the opportunity for training and other educational programs so that your registered representative may serve you better, this additional compensation also may afford Pacific Life a “preferred” status at the recipient broker-dealer and provide some other marketing benefit such as website placement, access to registered representative lists, extra marketing assistance or other heightened visibility and access to the broker-dealer’s sales force that may otherwise influence the way that the broker-dealer and the registered representative market the Contracts.

As of December 31, 2008, the following firms have arrangements in effect with the Distributor pursuant to which the firm is entitled to receive a revenue sharing payment:

A I G Financial Advisors Inc., AMCORE Investments Inc., Advantage Capital Corporation, American General Securities Inc., American Portfolios Financial Services Inc., Askar Corporation, Bancwest Investment Services Inc., Banc of America Investment Services Inc., C C O Investment Services Corp, Capital Investment Brokerage Inc., Capital Investment Group Inc., C U S O Financial Services L P, Centaurus Financial, Inc., Chevy Chase Financial Services Corp., Citigroup Global Markets Inc., Colonial Brokerage Inc., Commonwealth Financial Network, Compass Brokerage Inc., Countrywide Investment Services Inc., Essex National Securities Inc., F S C Securities Corporation, Financial Network Investment Corp., First Allied Securities Inc., First Heartland Capital Inc., First Tennessee Brokerage Inc., Geneos Wealth Management Inc., Great American Advisors Inc., I N G Financial Partners Inc., Invest Financial Corporation, Investacorp Inc., Investment Centers of America Inc., Investment Professionals Inc., J J B Hilliard, W L Lyons Inc., Jacques Financial L L C, Janney Montgomery Scott Inc., Key Investment Services L L C, L P L Financial Corp., Lincoln Financial Advisors Corp., Lincoln Financial Securities Corp., M Holdings Securities Inc., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith, Morgan Keegan & Company Inc., Multi-Financial Securities Corp., Mutual Of Omaha Investor Services Inc., N F P Securities Inc., NatCity Investments Inc.,

National Planning Corporation, NEXT Financial Group Inc., P N C Investments L L C, Pension Planners Securities Inc., Primevest Financial Services Inc., ProEquities Inc., R B C Capital Markets Corporation, Raymond James & Associates Inc., Raymond James Financial Services Inc., Robert W Baird & Company Inc., Royal Alliance Associates Inc., S I I Investments Inc., Securities America, Signator Investors Inc., Sorrento Pacific Financial L L C, Sterne Agee Financial Services Inc., Sterne, Agee & Leach Inc., Stifel Nicolaus & Company Inc., Suntrust Investment Services Inc., Tower Square Securities Inc., Transamerica Financial Advisors Inc., Triad Advisors Inc., U B S Financial Services Inc., U S Bancorp Investments Inc., Unionbanc Investment Services L L C, United Planners’ Financial Services of America, V S R Financial Services Inc., Vision Investment Services Inc., WaMu Investments Inc., Wachovia Securities Financial Network L L C, Wachovia Securities L L C, Walnut Street Securities, Wescom Financial Services L L C, Woodbury Financial Services Inc., Zions Direct Inc.

We or our affiliates may also pay override payments, expense allowances and reimbursements, bonuses, wholesaler fees, and training and marketing allowances. Such payments may offset the broker-dealer’s expenses in connection with activities that it is required to perform, such as educating personnel and maintaining records. Registered representatives may also receive non-cash compensation such as expense-paid educational or training seminars involving travel within and outside the U.S. or promotional merchandise.

All of the compensation described in this section, and other compensation or benefits provided by us or our affiliates, may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products and may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options. You may ask your registered representative about these potential conflicts of interests and how he/she and his/her broker-dealer are compensated for selling the Contract.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may from time to time bear all or a portion of the expenses of conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD that are attended by, among others, registered representatives of PSD, who would receive information and/or training regarding the Fund’s Portfolios and their management by the Portfolio Managers in addition to information respecting the variable annuity and/or life insurance products issued by Pacific Life and its affiliates. Other persons may also attend all or a portion of any such conferences or meetings, including directors, officers and employees of Pacific Life, officers and trustees of Pacific Select Fund, and spouses/guests of the foregoing. The Pacific Select Fund Board of Trustees may hold meetings concurrently with such a conference or meeting. The Pacific Select Fund pays for the expenses of the meetings of its Board of Trustees, including the pro rata share of expenses for attendance by the Trustees at the concurrent conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD. Additional expenses and promotional items may be paid for by Pacific Life and/or Portfolio Managers. PSD serves as the Pacific Select Fund Distributor.

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

The Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option is computed at the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which is usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on each Business Day. The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z


where	(Y)	=	the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
	(Z)	=	the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ¸ B) − C


where		(A)		=		the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c


where	(a)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
	(b)	=	the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by the Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
	(c)	=	any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;


(B)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
(C)	=	a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period, the basic Risk Charge plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in the Prospectus).

As explained in the Prospectus, the Annual Fee, if applicable, will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are assessed against your Variable Account Value through the automatic debit of Subaccount Units; the Annual Fee decreases the number of Subaccount Units attributed to your Contract but does not alter the Unit Value for any Subaccount.

Variable Annuity Payment Amounts

The following steps show how we determine the amount of each variable annuity payment under your Contract.

First: Pay Applicable Premium Taxes

When you convert your Net Contract Value into annuity payments, you must pay any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or any other taxes on your Contract Value (unless applicable law requires those taxes to be paid at a later time). We assess this charge by reducing your Account Value proportionately, relative to your Account Value in each Subaccount and in any fixed option, in an amount equal to the aggregate amount of the charges. The remaining amount of your available Net Contract Value may be used to provide variable annuity payments. Alternatively, your remaining available Net Contract Value may be used to provide fixed annuity payments, or it may be divided to provide both fixed and variable annuity payments. You may also choose to withdraw some or all of your remaining Net Contract Value, less any applicable optional Rider Charge, Annual Fee and any charges for premium taxes and/or any other taxes without converting this amount into annuity payments.

Second: The First Variable Payment

We begin by referring to your Contract’s Option Table for your Annuity Option (the “Annuity Option Table”). The Annuity Option Table allows us to calculate the dollar amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract, based on the amount applied toward the variable annuity. The number that the Annuity Option Table yields will be based on the Annuitant’s age (and, in certain cases, sex) and assumes a 5% rate of return, as described in more detail below.

Example: Assume a man is 65 years of age at his Annuity Date and has selected a lifetime annuity with monthly payments guaranteed for 10 years. According to the Annuity Option Table, this man should receive an initial monthly payment of $5.79 for every $1,000 of his Contract Value (reduced by applicable charges) that he will be using to provide variable payments. Therefore, if his Contract Value after deducting applicable fees and charges is $100,000 on his Annuity Date and he applies this entire amount toward his variable annuity, his first monthly payment will be $579.00.

You may choose any other Annuity Option Table that assumes a different rate of return which we offer at the time your Annuity Option is effective.

Third: Subaccount Annuity Units

For each Subaccount, we use the amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract attributed to each Subaccount to determine the number of Subaccount Annuity Units that will form the basis of subsequent payment amounts. First, we use the Annuity Option Table to determine the amount of that first variable payment for each Subaccount. Then, for each Subaccount, we divide that amount of the first variable annuity payment by the value of one Subaccount Annuity Unit (the “Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”) as of the end of the Annuity Date to obtain the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that particular Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units used to calculate subsequent payments under your Contract will not change unless exchanges of Annuity Units are made, (or if the Joint and Survivor Annuity Option is elected and the Primary Annuitant dies first) but the value of those Annuity Units will change daily, as described below.

Fourth: The Subsequent Variable Payments

The amount of each subsequent variable annuity payment will be the sum of the amounts payable based on each Subaccount. The amount payable based on each Subaccount is equal to the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by their Subaccount Annuity Unit Value at the end of the Business Day in each payment period you elected that corresponds to the Annuity Date.

Each Subaccount’s Subaccount Annuity Unit Value, like its Subaccount Unit Value, changes each day to reflect the net investment results of the underlying investment vehicle, as well as the assessment of the Risk Charge at an annual rate of 0.60% and the Administrative Fee at an annual rate of 0.15%. In addition, the calculation of Subaccount Annuity Unit Value incorporates an additional factor; as discussed in more detail below, this additional factor adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to correct for the Option Table’s implicit assumed annual investment return on amounts applied but not yet used to furnish annuity benefits. Any increase in your Risk Charge for an optional death benefit rider is not charged on and after the Annuity Date.

Different Subaccounts may be selected for your Contract before and after your Annuity Date, subject to any restrictions we may establish. Currently, you may exchange Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount for Subaccount Annuity Units in any other Subaccount(s) up to four times in any twelve month period after your Annuity Date. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount may change due to such exchanges. Exchanges following your Annuity Date will be made by exchanging Subaccount Annuity Units of equivalent aggregate value, based on their relative Subaccount Annuity Unit Values.

Understanding the “Assumed Investment Return” Factors

The Annuity Option Table incorporates a number of implicit assumptions in determining the amount of your first variable annuity payment. As noted above, the numbers in the Annuity Option Table reflect certain actuarial assumptions based on the Annuitant’s age, and, in some cases, the Annuitant’s sex. In addition, these numbers assume

that the amount of your Contract Value that you convert to a variable annuity will have a positive net investment return of 5% each year during the payout of your annuity; thus 5% is referred to as an “assumed investment return.”

The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for a Subaccount will increase only to the extent that the investment performance of that Subaccount exceeds the Risk Charge, the Administrative Fee, and the assumed investment return. The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for any Subaccount will generally be less than the Subaccount Unit Value for that same Subaccount, and the difference will be the amount of the assumed investment return factor.

Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 5.00% per year (after deduction of the 0.60% Risk Charge and the 0.15% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 5.00% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would not increase (or decrease) at all. The net investment factor for that 5% return [1.05] is then divided by the factor for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:


1.05 1.05		= 1; 1 − 1 = 0; 0 × 100% = 0%.

If the net investment performance of a Subaccount’s assets is at a rate less than 5.00% per year, the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value will decrease, even if the Subaccount Unit Value is increasing.

Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 2.60% per year (after deduction of the 0.60% Risk Charge and the 0.15% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 2.60% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would decrease at a rate of 2.29% per year. The net investment factor for that 2.6% return [1.026] is then divided by the factor for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:


1.026 1.05		= 0.9771; 0.9771 − 1 = −0.0229; −0.0229 × 100% = −2.29%.

The assumed investment return will always cause increases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat less than if the assumption had not been made, will cause decreases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat greater than if the assumption had not been made, and will (as shown in the example above) sometimes cause a decrease in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to take place when an increase would have occurred if the assumption had not been made. If we had assumed a higher investment return in our Annuity Option tables, it would produce annuities with larger first payments, but the increases in subaccount annuity payments would be smaller and the decreases in subsequent annuity payments would be greater; a lower assumed investment return would produce annuities with smaller first payments, and the increases in subsequent annuity payments would be greater and the decreases in subsequent annuity payments would be smaller.

Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Options 2 and 4

If variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. The amount available upon a full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return.

The variable payment amount we use in calculating the present value is determined by summing an amount for each Subaccount, which we calculate by multiplying your Subaccount Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit Value next computed after we receive your redemption request. This variable payment amount is then discounted at the assumed investment return from each future Annuity Payment date that falls within the payment guaranteed period. The sum of these discounted remaining variable payment amounts is the present value of remaining guaranteed variable payments.

If you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will not make any additional variable annuity payments during the remaining guaranteed period after the redemption.

If you elect to redeem a portion of the remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will reduce the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount by the same percentage as the partial redemption value bears to the amount available upon a full redemption.

Redemption of remaining guaranteed variable payments will not affect the amount of any fixed annuity payments.

Corresponding Dates

If any transaction or event under your Contract is scheduled to occur on a “corresponding date” that does not exist in a given calendar period, the transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the following Business Day. In addition, as stated in the Prospectus, any event scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day will occur on the next succeeding Business Day.

Example: If your Contract is issued on February 29 in year 1 (a leap year), your Contract Anniversary in years 2, 3 and 4 will be on March 1.

Example: If your Annuity Date is July 31 and you select monthly annuity payments, the payments received will be based on valuations made on July 31, August 31, October 1 (for September), October 31, December 1 (for November), December 31, January 31, March 1 (for February), March 31, May 1 (for April), May 31 and July 1 (for June).

Age and Sex of Annuitant

The Contracts generally provide for sex-distinct annuity income factors in the case of life annuities. Statistically, females tend to have longer life expectancies than males; consequently, if the amount of annuity payments is based on life expectancy, they will ordinarily be higher if an annuitant is male than if an annuitant is female. Certain states’ regulations prohibit sex-distinct annuity income factors, and Contracts issued in those states will use unisex factors. In addition, Contracts issued in connection with Qualified Plans are required to use unisex factors.

We may require proof of your Annuitant’s age and sex before or after commencing annuity payments. If the age or sex (or both) of your Annuitant are incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will correct the amount payable to equal the amount that the annuitized portion of the Contract Value under that Contract would have purchased for your Annuitant’s correct age and sex. If we make the correction after annuity payments have started, and we have made overpayments based on the incorrect information, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with interest at 3% a year, from any payments due then or later; if we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with interest at 3% a year, of the underpayments to the next payment we make after we receive proof of the correct age and/or sex.

Additionally, we may require proof of the Annuitant’s or Owner’s age before any payments associated with the Death Benefit provisions of your Contract are made. If the age or sex of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will base any payment associated with the Death Benefit provisions on your Contract on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct age or sex.

Systematic Transfer Programs

The fixed option(s) are not available in connection with portfolio rebalancing. If you are using the earnings sweep, you may also use portfolio rebalancing only if you selected the Money Market Subaccount. You may not use dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, and the earnings sweep at the same time. Only portfolio rebalancing is available after you annuitize. The systematic transfer options are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. In addition, no fixed option(s) may be used as the target Investment Option under any systematic transfer program.

Dollar Cost Averaging

When you request dollar cost averaging, you are authorizing us to make periodic reallocations of your Contract Value without waiting for any further instruction from you. You may request to begin or stop dollar cost averaging at any time prior to your Annuity Date; the effective date of your request will be the day we receive notice from you in a form satisfactory to us. Your request may specify the date on which you want your first transfer to be made. Your first

transfer may not be made until 30 days after your Contract Date, and if you specify an earlier date, your first transfer will be delayed until one calendar month after the date you specify. If you request dollar cost averaging on your application for your Contract and you fail to specify a date for your first transfer, your first transfer will be made one period after your Contract Date (that is, if you specify monthly transfers, the first transfer will occur 30 days after your Contract Date; quarterly transfers, 90 days after your Contract Date; semi-annual transfers, 180 days after your Contract Date; and if you specify annual transfers, the first transfer will occur on your Contract Anniversary). If you stop dollar cost averaging, you must wait 30 days before you may begin this option again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30 day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must specify the Investment Option you wish to transfer money from (your “source account”). You may choose any one Investment Option as your source account. The Account Value of your source account must be at least $5,000 for you to begin dollar cost averaging. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must also specify the amount and frequency of your transfers. You may choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual transfers. The amount of your transfers may be specified as a dollar amount or a percentage of your source Account Value; however, each transfer must be at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum transfer amount but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Dollar cost averaging transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

Finally, your request must specify the Variable Investment Option(s) you wish to transfer amounts to (your “target account(s)”). If you select more than one target account, your dollar cost averaging request must specify how transferred amounts should be allocated among the target accounts. Your source account may not also be a target account.

Your dollar cost averaging transfers will continue until the earlier of:


	•	your request to stop dollar cost averaging is effective, or

	•	your source Account Value is zero, or

	•	your Annuity Date.

If, as a result of a dollar cost averaging transfer, your source Account Value falls below any minimum Account Value we may establish, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the dollar cost averaging option at any time.

Portfolio Rebalancing

Portfolio rebalancing allows you to maintain the percentage of your Contract Value allocated to each Variable Investment Option at a pre-set level prior to annuitization.

For example, you could specify that 30% of your Contract Value should be in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount.

Over time, the variations in each Subaccount’s investment results will shift this balance of these Subaccount Value allocations. If you elect the portfolio rebalancing feature, we will automatically transfer your Subaccount Value back to the percentages you specify.

You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually. Only portfolio rebalancing is available after you annuitize.

Procedures for selecting portfolio rebalancing are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging: You may make your request at any time prior to your Annuity Date and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop portfolio rebalancing, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first rebalance will be delayed one month, and if you request rebalancing on your application but do not specify a date for the first rebalance, it will occur

one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging. We may change, terminate or suspend the portfolio rebalancing feature at any time.

Earnings Sweep

An earnings sweep automatically transfers the earnings attributable to the Money Market Subaccount (the “sweep option”) to one or more other Variable Investment Options (your “target option(s)”). The Account Value of your sweep option will be required to be at least $5,000 when you elect the earnings sweep. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future.

You may choose to have earnings sweeps occur monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually until you annuitize. At each earnings sweep, we will automatically transfer your accumulated earnings attributable to your sweep option for the previous period proportionately to your target option(s). That is, if you select a monthly earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings from the preceding month; if you select a semi-annual earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings accumulated over the preceding 6 months. Earnings sweep transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

To determine the earnings, we take the change in the sweep option’s Account Value during the sweep period, add any withdrawals or transfers out of the sweep option Account that occurred during the sweep period, and subtract any allocations to the sweep option Account during the sweep period. The result of this calculation represents the “total earnings” for the sweep period.

If, during the sweep period, you withdraw or transfer amounts from the sweep option Account, we assume that earnings are withdrawn or transferred before any other Account Value. Therefore, your “total earnings” for the sweep period will be reduced by any amounts withdrawn or transferred during the sweep option period. The remaining earnings are eligible for the sweep transfer.

Procedures for selecting the earnings sweep are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging and portfolio rebalancing: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop the earnings sweep, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first earnings sweep will be delayed one month, and if you request the earnings sweep on your application but do not specify a date for the first sweep, it will occur one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging.

If, as a result of an earnings sweep transfer, your source Account Value falls below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the earnings sweep option at any time.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

You may specify a dollar amount for your pre-authorized withdrawals, or you may specify a percentage of your Contract Value or an Account Value. You may direct us to make your pre-authorized withdrawals from one or more specific Investment Options. If you do not give us these specific instructions, amounts will be deducted proportionately from your Account Value in each Investment Option.

Procedures for selecting pre-authorized withdrawals are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweeps: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop the pre-authorized withdrawals, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Account Value in any Investment Option to fall below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Contract Value to fall below $1,000, we may, at our option, terminate your Contract and send you the remaining withdrawal proceeds.

Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to federal income tax on its taxable portion, and, if you have not reached age 591/2, may be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.

Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts

On your Annuity Date, if your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), and you change your marital status after your Contract Date, you may be permitted to add a Joint Annuitant and to change your Joint Annuitant. Generally speaking, you may be permitted to add a new spouse as a Joint Annuitant, and you may be permitted to remove a Joint Annuitant who is no longer your spouse.

More on Federal Tax Issues

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Pacific Select Fund SAI. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the Contract meet these requirements. On March 7, 2008, the Treasury Department issued Final Regulations under Section 817(h). These Final Regulations do not provide guidance concerning the extent to which you may direct your investments to particular divisions of a separate account. Such guidance may be included in regulations or revenue rulings under Section 817(d) relating to the definition of a variable contract. We reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to ensure that your Contract continues to qualify as an annuity for tax purposes. Any such changes will apply uniformly to affected Contract Owners and will be made with such notice to affected Contract Owners as is feasible under the circumstances.

For a variable life insurance contract or a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of “investor control” the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities.

Generally, according to the IRS, there are two ways that impermissible investor control may exist. The first relates to the design of the contract or the relationship between the contract and a separate account or underlying fund. For example, at various times, the IRS has focused on, among other factors, the number and type of investment choices available pursuant to a given variable contract, whether the contract offers access to funds that are available to the general public, the number of transfers that a contract owner may make from one investment option to another, and the degree to which a contract owner may select or control particular investments.

With respect to this first aspect of investor control, we believe that the design of our contracts and the relationship between our contracts and the Portfolios satisfy the current view of the IRS on this subject, such that the investor control doctrine should not apply. However, because of some uncertainty with respect to this subject and because the IRS may issue further guidance on this subject, we reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to reduce the risk that your contract might not qualify as a life insurance contract or as an annuity for tax purposes.

The second way that impermissible investor control might exist concerns your actions. Under the IRS pronouncements, you may not select or control particular investments, other than choosing among broad investment choices such as selecting a particular Portfolio. You may not select or direct the purchase or sale of a particular investment of a Separate Account, a Subaccount (or Variable Investment Option), or a Portfolio. All investment decisions concerning the Separate Accounts and the Subaccounts must be made by us, and all investment decisions concerning the underlying Portfolios must be made by the portfolio manager for such Portfolio in his or her sole and absolute discretion, and not by the contract owner. Furthermore, under the IRS pronouncements, you may not enter into an agreement or arrangement with a portfolio manager of a Portfolio or communicate directly or indirectly with such a portfolio manager or any related investment officers concerning the selection, quality, or rate of return of any specific investment or group of investments held by a Portfolio, and you may not enter into any such agreement or arrangement or have any such communication with us or PLFA.

Finally, the IRS may issue additional guidance on the investor control doctrine, which might further restrict your actions or features of the variable contract. Such guidance could be applied retroactively. If any of the rules outlined above are not complied with, the IRS may seek to tax you currently on income and gains from a Portfolio such that you would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities. Although highly unlikely, such an event may have an adverse impact on the fund and other variable contracts. We urge you to consult your own tax adviser with respect to the application of the investor control doctrine.

Loans


	•	not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,

	•	issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and

	•	permits loans under its terms (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).

You will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. This loan rate may vary by state.

Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan Account Value accrue daily beginning on the day following the effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance with your most recent allocation instructions.

We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the Code or interpretations thereof.

Tax and Legal Matters

The tax and ERISA rules relating to Contract loans are complex and in many cases unclear. For these reasons, and because the rules vary depending on the individual circumstances, these loans are processed by your Plan Administrator. We urge you to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction under your Contract.

Generally, interest paid on your loan under a 403(b) tax-sheltered annuity will be considered non-deductible “personal interest” under Section 163(h) of the Code, to the extent the loan comes from and is secured by your pre-tax contributions, even if the proceeds of your loan are used to acquire your principal residence.

Loan Procedures

Your loan request must be submitted on our Non-ERISA TSA Application and Loan Agreement Form. You may submit a loan request 30 days after your Contract Date and before your Annuity Date. However, before requesting a new loan, you must wait 30 days after the last payment of a previous loan. If approved, your loan will usually be effective as of the end of the Business Day on which we receive all necessary documentation in proper form. We will normally forward proceeds of your loan to you within 7 calendar days after the effective date of your loan.

In order to secure your loan, on the effective date of your loan, we will transfer an amount equal to the principal amount of your loan into an account called the “Loan Account.” The Loan Account is held under the General Account. To make this transfer, we will transfer amounts proportionately from your Investment Options based on your Account Value in each Investment Option.

As your loan is repaid, a portion, corresponding to the amount of the repayment of any amount then held as security for your loan, will be transferred from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

A transfer from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under the transfer limitations as stated in the HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions section in the Prospectus.

Loan Terms


	•	50% of the amount available for withdrawal under this Contract (see WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals – Amount Available for Withdrawal), or

	•	$50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.

You should refer to the terms of your particular Loan Eligible Plan for any additional loan restrictions. If you have other loans outstanding pursuant to other Loan Eligible Plans, the amount you may borrow may be further restricted. We are not responsible for making any determination (including loan amounts permitted) or any interpretation with respect to your Loan Eligible Plan.

If you purchase any optional living benefit rider (including any and all previous, current, and future versions), there may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional living benefit rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional living benefit rider is appropriate for you.

Repayment Terms

Your loan, including principal and accrued interest, generally must be repaid in quarterly installments. An installment will be due in each quarter on the date corresponding to the effective date of your loan, beginning with the first such date following the effective date of your loan. See the Qualified Contracts – Loans section in the Prospectus.

Example: On May 1, we receive your loan request, and your loan is effective. Your first quarterly payment will be due on August 1.

Adverse tax consequences may result if you fail to meet the repayment requirements for your loan. You must repay principal and interest of any loan in substantially equal payments over the term of the loan. Generally, the term of the loan will be 5 years from the effective date of the loan. However, if you have certified to us that your loan proceeds are to be used to acquire a principal residence for yourself, you may request a loan term of 30 years. In either case, however, you must repay your loan prior to your Annuity Date. If you elect to annuitize (or withdraw) your Net Contract Value while you have an outstanding loan, we will deduct any Contract Debt from your Contract Value at the time of the annuitization (or withdrawal) to repay the Contract Debt.

You may prepay your entire loan at any time. If you do so, we will bill you for any unpaid interest that has accrued through the date of payoff. Your loan will be considered repaid only when the interest due has been paid. Subject to any necessary approval of state insurance authorities, while you have Contract Debt outstanding, we will treat all payments you send us as Investments unless you specifically indicate that your payment is a loan repayment or include your loan payment notice with your payment. To the extent allowed by law, any loan repayments in excess of the amount then due will be applied to the principal balance of your loan. Such repayments will not change the due dates or the periodic repayment amount due for future periods. If a loan repayment is in excess of the principal balance of your loan, any excess repayment will be refunded to you. Repayments we receive that are less than the amount then due will be returned to you, unless otherwise required by law.

If we have not received your full payment by its due date, we will declare the entire remaining loan balance in default. At that time, we will send written notification of the amount needed to bring the loan back to a current status. You will have 60 days from the date on which the loan was declared in default (the “grace period”) to make the required payment.

If the required payment is not received by the end of the grace period, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest will be withdrawn from your Contract Value, if amounts under your Contract are eligible for distribution. In order for an amount to be eligible for distribution from a TSA funded by salary reductions you must meet one of five triggering events. The triggering events are:


	•	attainment of age 591/2,


	•	severance from employment,

	•	death,

	•	disability, and

	•	financial hardship (with respect to contributions only, not income or earnings on these contributions).

If those amounts are not eligible for distribution, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest will be considered a Deemed Distribution and will be withdrawn when such Contract Values become eligible. In either case, the Distribution or the Deemed Distribution will be considered a currently taxable event, and may be subject to federal tax withholding and may be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.

If there is a Deemed Distribution under your Contract and to the extent allowed by law, any future withdrawals will first be applied as repayment of the defaulted Contract Debt, including accrued interest and charges for applicable taxes. Any amounts withdrawn and applied as repayment of Contract Debt will first be withdrawn from your Loan Account, and then from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to the Account Value in each Investment Option. If you have an outstanding loan that is in default, the defaulted Contract Debt will be considered a withdrawal for the purpose of calculating any Death Benefit Amount and/or Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

The terms of any such loan are intended to qualify for the exception in Code Section 72(p)(2) so that the distribution of the loan proceeds will not constitute a distribution that is taxable to you. To that end, these loan provisions will be interpreted to ensure and maintain such tax qualification, despite any other provisions to the contrary. Subject to any regulatory approval, we reserve the right to amend your Contract to reflect any clarifications that may be needed or are appropriate to maintain such tax qualification or to conform any terms of our loan arrangement with you to any applicable changes in the tax qualification requirements. We will send you a copy of any such amendment. If you refuse such an amendment, it may result in adverse tax consequences to you.

Safekeeping of Assets

We are responsible for the safekeeping of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets are held separate and apart from the assets of our General Account and our other separate accounts.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2008, the related statements of operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods presented and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in this Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2008. Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2008 and 2007 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2008 are attached. These financial statements should be considered only as bearing on the ability of Pacific Life to meet its obligations under the Contracts and not as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the Separate Account.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

The financial statements of Separate Account A of Pacific Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2008 and for each of the periods presented have been audited by [ ], independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2008, which is incorporated by reference in this Registration statement.

The consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2008 and 2007 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2008 have been audited by [ ], independent auditors, as stated in their report appearing herein.

Audited Financial Statements dated as of December 31, 2008 and for each of the periods presented which are incorporated by reference from the 2008 Annual Report include the following for Separate Account A:

     Statements of Assets and Liabilities
     Statements of Operations
     Statements of Changes in Net Assets
     Notes to Financial Statements
     Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Audited Consolidated Financial Statements dated as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2008, included in Part B include the following for Pacific Life:

     Independent Auditors’ Report
     Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition
     Consolidated Statements of Operations
     Consolidated Statements of Stockholder’s Equity
     Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
     Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements


2.	Not applicable

3.	(a)	Distribution Agreement between Pacific Life Insurance Company (formerly Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company) and Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (“PSD”)(formerly Pacific Equities Network)¹

	(b)	Form of Selling Agreement between Pacific Life, PSD and Various Broker Dealers⁷

4.	(a)	Individual Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity Contract (Form No. 10-1170)

	(b)	(1) 403(b) Tax-Sheltered Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-15200)⁸

		(2) 403(b) Tax-Sheltered Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-1156)¹¹

	(c)	Section 457 Plan Rider (Form No. 24-123799)⁸

	(d)	Individual Retirement Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-18900)⁴

	(e)	Roth Individual Retirement Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-19000)⁴

	(f)	SIMPLE Individual Retirement Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-19100)⁴

	(g)	Qualified Retirement Plan Rider (Form No. 20-14200)⁸

	(h)	DCA Plus Fixed Option Rider (Form No. 20-1103)⁵

	(i)	Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit III Rider (Form No. 20-1153)¹⁰

	(j)	Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (Form No. 20-1172)

5.	(a)	Variable Annuity Application. [TO BE FILED]

	(b)	Portfolio Optimization Enrollment/Rider Request Form (Form No. 2150-6B)⁷

6.	(a)	Pacific Life’s Articles of Incorporation²

	(b)	By-laws of Pacific Life²

	(c)	Pacific Life’s Restated Articles of Incorporation⁷

	(d)	By-laws of Pacific Life As Amended September 1, 2005⁷

7.	Form of Reinsurance Agreement⁹

8.	(a)	Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement³

	(b)	Fund Participation Agreement Between Pacific Life Insurance Company, Pacific Select
		Distributions, Inc., American Funds Insurance Series, American Funds Distributors,
		and Capital Research and Management Company⁶

	(c)	Exhibit B to the Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add International Small-Cap and Diversified Bond)⁷

	(d)	Form of AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. Participation Agreement¹⁰

	(e)	Form of BlackRock Variable Series Fund, Inc. Participation Agreement¹⁰

	(f)	Form of Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust Participation Agreement¹⁰

	(g)	Form of AllianceBernstein Investments, Inc. Administrative Services Agreement¹⁰

	(h)	Form of BlackRock Distributors, Inc. Administrative Services Agreement¹⁰

	(i)	Form of Franklin Templeton Services, LLC Administrative Services Agreement¹⁰

	(j)	Form of AIM Variable Insurance Funds Participation Agreement¹¹

	(k)	Form of Invesco Aim Distributors, Inc. Distribution Services Agreement¹¹

	(l)	Form of Invesco Aim Advisors, Inc. Administrative Services Agreement¹¹

	(m)	Form of GE Investments Funds, Inc. Participation Agreement¹¹

	(n)	Form of GE Investment Distributors, Inc. Distribution and Services Agreement¹¹

	(o)	Form of Van Kampen Life Investment Trust Participation Agreement¹¹

	(p)	Form of Van Kampen Funds, Inc. Shareholder Service Agreement¹¹

	(q)	Form of Van Kampen Asset Management Administrative Services Letter Agreement¹¹

9.	Opinion and Consent of legal officer of Pacific Life Insurance Company as to the legality of Contracts being registered

Item 26. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control with Pacific Life or Separate Account A.

The following is an explanation of the organization chart of Pacific Life’s subsidiaries:

Pacific Life is a Nebraska Stock Life Insurance Company wholly-owned by Pacific LifeCorp (a Delaware Stock Holding Company), which is, in turn, 100% owned by Pacific Mutual Holding Company (a Nebraska Mutual Insurance Holding Company).

PACIFIC LIFE, SUBSIDIARIES & AFFILIATED ENTERPRISES
LEGAL STRUCTURE


	Jurisdiction of	Percentage of
	Incorporation or	Ownership by its
	Organization	Immediate Parent
Pacific Mutual Holding Company	Nebraska
Pacific LifeCorp	Delaware		100
Pacific Life Insurance Company	Nebraska		100
Pacific Life & Annuity Company	Arizona		100
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc.	California		100
Pacific Select, LLC	Delaware		100
Pacific Asset Holding LLC	Delaware		100
Pacific TriGuard Partners LLC #	Delaware		100
Grayhawk Golf Holdings, LLC	Delaware		95
Grayhawk Golf L.L.C.	Arizona		100
Las Vegas Golf I, LLC	Delaware		100
Angel Park Golf, LLC	Nevada		100
CW Atlanta, LLC	Delaware		100
City Walk Towers, LLC	Delaware		100
Kierland One, LLC	Delaware		100
Kinzie Member, LLC	Delaware		100
Parcel B Owner LLC	Delaware		88
Kinzie Parcel A Member, LLC	Delaware		100
Parcel A Owner LLC	Delaware		90
PL/KBS Fund Member, LLC	Delaware		100
KBS/PL Properties, L.P. #	Delaware		99.9
Wildflower Member, LLC	Delaware		100
Epoch-Wildflower, LLC	Florida		99
Confederation Life Insurance and Annuity Company	Georgia		100
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC +	Delaware		100
Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Company of Vermont	Vermont		100
Pacific Mezzanine Associates L.L.C.	Delaware		67
Pacific Mezzanine Investors L.L.C. #	Delaware		100
College Savings Bank	New Jersey		100
Pacific Asset Funding, LLC	Delaware		100
PL Trading Company, LLC	Delaware		100
Pacific Life Trade Services, Limited	Hong Kong		100
Pacific Life & Annuity Services, Inc.	Colorado		100
Bella Sera Holdings, LLC	Delaware		100
Pacific Life Re Holdings LLC	Delaware		100
Pacific Life Re Holdings Limited	U.K.		100
Pacific Life Re Services Limited	U.K.		100
Pacific Life Re Limited	U.K.		100
Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Ltd.	Bermuda		100
Aviation Capital Group Corp.	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition Corporation V	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 41 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 42 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG International Ltd.	Bermuda		100
ACG Acquisition Ireland III Limited	Ireland		100
ACG Acquisition Ireland IV Ltd.	Ireland		100
ACG Acquisition Ireland V Ltd.	Ireland		100
ACG Investment Capital Partners LLC	Delaware		50
MAPF Holdings LLC	Delaware		33
ACG Acquisition VI LLC	Nevada		50
ACG Acquisition XIX LLC	Delaware		20
ACG XIX Holding LLC	Delaware		100
Aviation Capital Group Trust	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition XV LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition XX LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition Ireland Limited	Ireland		100
ACG Acquisition Labuan Ltd.	Labuan		100
ACG Acquisitions Sweden AB	Sweden		100
ACG Acquisition (Bermuda) Ltd.	Bermuda		100
ACG Acquisition XXI LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Trust 2004 -1 Holding LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Funding Trust 2004-1	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 30746 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Trust II Holding LLC	Delaware		100
Aviation Capital Group Trust II	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition XXV LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 37 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 38 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition Ireland II Limited	Ireland		100
ACG Acquisition (Bermuda) II Ltd.	Bermuda		100
ACG Acquisition XXIX LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition XXX LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 31 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 32 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 33 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 34 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 36 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 39 LLC	Delaware		100
ACGFS LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 35 LLC	Delaware		100
Boullioun Aviation Services Inc.	Washington		100
Boullioun Aviation Services (International) Inc.	Washington		100
Boullioun Aircraft Holding Company, Inc.	Washington		100
Boullioun Portfolio Finance III LLC	Nevada		100
ACG Funding 2005-1 Holding LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Funding Trust 2005-1	Delaware		100
ACG III Holding LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Trust III	Delaware		100
RAIN I LLC	Delaware		100
RAIN II LLC	Delaware		100
RAIN III LLC	Delaware		100
RAIN IV LLC	Delaware		100
RAIN V LLC	Delaware		100
RAIN VI LLC	Delaware		100
RAIN VII LLC	Delaware		100
RAIN VIII LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 30271 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 30286 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 30744 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 30745 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 30289 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 30293 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 1176 LLC	Delaware		100
0168 Statutory Trust	Connecticut		100
0179 Statutory Trust	Connecticut		100
Bellevue Aircraft Leasing Limited	Ireland		100
Rainier Aircraft Leasing (Ireland) Limited	Ireland		100
ACG Acquisition (Cyprus) Ltd.	Cyprus		100
ACG Acquisition (Bermuda) III Ltd.	Bermuda		100
ACG 2006-ECA LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 2692 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG ECA-2006 Ireland Limited	Ireland		100
ACG Acquisition 2987 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition 3141 LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Acquisition Aruba NV	Aruba		100
ACG Trust 2006-1 Holding LLC	Delaware		100
ACG Funding Trust 2006-1	Delaware		100
ACG Capital Partners LLC	Delaware		50
Bellevue Coastal Leasing LLC	Washington		100
ACG Capital Partners Ireland Limited	Ireland		100
ACG Acquisition 30288 LLC	Delaware		100
ACGCP Acquisition 979 LLC	Delaware		100


#		Abbreviated structure

+		A Division of Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC does business as Pacific Asset Management

(a)

The Distribution Agreement between Pacific Life and Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) provides substantially as follows:

Pacific Life hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless PSD and its officers and directors, and employees for any expenses (including legal expenses), losses, claims, damages, or liabilities incurred by reason of any untrue or alleged untrue statement or representation of a material fact or any omission or alleged omission to state a material fact required to be stated to make other statements not misleading, if made in reliance on any prospectus, registration statement, post effective amendment thereof, or sales materials supplied or approved by Pacific Life or the Separate Account. Pacific Life shall reimburse each such person for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred in connection with investigating or defending any such loss, liability, damage, or claim. However, in no case shall Pacific Life be required to indemnify for any expenses, losses, claims, damages, or liabilities which have resulted from the willful misfeasance, bad faith, negligence, misconduct, or wrongful act of PSD.

PSD hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Pacific Life, its officers, directors, and employees, and the Separate Account for any expenses, losses, claims, damages, or liabilities arising out of or based upon any of the following in connection with the offer or sale of the contracts: (1) except for such statements made in reliance on any prospectus, registration statement or sales material supplied or approved by Pacific Life or the Separate Account, any untrue or alleged untrue statement or representation is made; (2) any failure to deliver a currently effective prospectus; (3) the use of any unauthorized sales literature by any officer, employee or agent of PSD or Broker; (4) any willful misfeasance, bad faith, negligence, misconduct or wrongful act. PSD shall reimburse each such person for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred in connection with investigating or defending any such loss, liability, damage, or claim.

(b)

The Form of Selling Agreement between Pacific Life, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) and Various Broker-Dealers and Agency (Selling Entities) provides substantially as follows:

Pacific Life and PSD agree to indemnify and hold harmless Selling Entities, their officers, directors, agents and employees, against any and all losses, claims, damages, or liabilities to which they may become subject under the Securities Act, the Exchange Act, the Investment Company Act of 1940, or other federal or state statutory law or regulation, at common law or otherwise, insofar as such losses, claims, damages or liabilities (or actions in respect thereof) arise out of or are based upon any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or any omission or alleged omission to state a material fact required to be stated or necessary to make the statements made not misleading in the registration statement for the Contracts or for the shares of Pacific Select Fund (the “Fund”) filed pursuant to the Securities Act, or any prospectus included as a part thereof, as from time to time amended and supplemented, or in any advertisement or sales literature provided by Pacific Life and PSD.

Selling Entities agree to, jointly and severally, hold harmless and indemnify Pacific Life and PSD and any of their respective affiliates, employees, officers, agents and directors (collectively, “Indemnified Persons”) against any and all claims, liabilities and expenses (including, without limitation, losses occasioned by any rescission of any Contract pursuant to a “free look” provision or by any return of initial purchase payment in connection with an incomplete application), including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and any loss attributable to the investment experience under a Contract, that any Indemnified Person may incur from liabilities resulting or arising out of or based upon (a) any untrue or alleged untrue statement other than statements contained in the registration statement or prospectus relating to any Contract, (b) (i) any inaccurate or misleading, or allegedly inaccurate or misleading sales material used in connection with any marketing or solicitation relating to any Contract, other than sales material provided preprinted by Pacific Life or PSD, and (ii) any use of any sales material that either has not been specifically approved in writing by Pacific Life or PSD or that, although previously approved in writing by Pacific Life or PSD, has been disapproved, in writing by either of them, for further use, or (c) any act or omission of a Subagent, director, officer or employee of Selling Entities, including, without limitation, any failure of Selling Entities or any Subagent to be registered as required as a broker/dealer under the 1934 Act, or licensed in accordance with the rules of any applicable SRO or insurance regulator.

(a)

PSD also acts as principal underwriter for Pacific Select Variable Annuity Separate Account, Separate Account B, Pacific Corinthian Variable Separate Account, Pacific Select Separate Account, Pacific Select Exec Separate Account, COLI Separate Account, COLI II Separate Account, COLI III Separate Account, Separate Account A of Pacific Life & Annuity Company, Pacific Select Exec Separate Account of Pacific Life & Annuity Company,

(b)

For information regarding PSD, reference is made to Form B-D, SEC File No. 8-15264, which is herein incorporated by reference.

(c)

PSD retains no compensation or net discounts or commissions from the Registrant.

The accounts, books and other documents required to be maintained by Registrant pursuant to Section 31(a) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 and the rules under that section will be maintained by Pacific Life at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

(a)

to file a post-effective amendment to this registration statement as frequently as is necessary to ensure that the audited financial statements in this registration statement are never more than 16 months old for so long as payments under the variable annuity contracts may be accepted, unless otherwise permitted.

(b)

to include either (1) as a part of any application to purchase a contract offered by the prospectus, a space that an applicant can check to request a Statement of Additional Information, or (2) a post card or similar written communication affixed to or included in the prospectus that the applicant can remove to send for a Statement of Additional Information, or (3) to deliver a Statement of Additional Information with the Prospectus.

(c)

to deliver any Statement of Additional Information and any financial statements required to be made available under this Form promptly upon written or oral request.

(a) The Registrant and its Depositor are relying upon American Council of Life Insurance, SEC No-Action Letter, SEC Ref. No. 1P-6-88 (November 28, 1988) with respect to annuity contracts offered as funding vehicles for retirement plans meeting the requirements of Section 403(b) of the Internal Revenue Code, and the provisions of paragraphs (1)-(4) of this letter have been complied with.

(b) The Registrant and its Depositor are relying upon Rule 6c-7 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 with respect to annuity contracts offered as funding vehicles to participants in the Texas Optional Retirement Program, and the provisions of Paragraphs (a)-(d) of the Rule have been complied with.

(c) REPRESENTATION PURSUANT TO SECTION 26(f) OF THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940: Pacific Life Insurance Company and Registrant represent that the fees and charges to be deducted under the Variable Annuity Contract (“Contract”) described in the prospectus contained in this registration statement are, in the aggregate, reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed in connection with the Contract.

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, the Registrant certifies that it has caused this Registration Statement on Form N-4 to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned thereunto duly authorized in the City of Newport Beach, and the State of California on this 24^th day of July, 2009.

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated:

(Powers of Attorney are contained in this Registration Statement as Exhibit 13).

Exhibit 4(a)

Pacific Life Insurance Company
700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, CA 92660
(800) 722-4448

READ YOUR CONTRACT CAREFULLY

This is a legal contract between you (the “Owner”) and Pacific Life Insurance Company, a stock company (hereinafter referred to as “we”, “us”, “our” and the “Company”).

We agree to pay the benefits provided under this Contract, subject to its provisions.

We have issued this Contract in consideration of the application and payment of the Initial Purchase Payment.

BENEFITS AND VALUES PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT MAY BE ON A VARIABLE BASIS. AMOUNTS DIRECTED INTO ONE OR MORE OF THE VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS WILL REFLECT THE INVESTMENT EXPERIENCE OF THOSE INVESTMENT OPTIONS. THESE AMOUNTS MAY INCREASE OR DECREASE, AND ARE NOT GUARANTEED AS TO A DOLLAR AMOUNT. THE DETAILS OF THE VARIABLE PROVISIONS BEGIN ON PAGE 10.

Right to Cancel — You may return this Contract within ten (10) days after you receive it. To do so, mail it to us at our Service Center or to the agent who sold it to you. We will refund the Contract Value as of the date the returned Contract is delivered to us in good order, including any Sales Charges, charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes that were deducted from the Contract Value.

Signed for the Company at Newport Beach, California, to be effective as of the Contract Date.

PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY



Chairman and Chief Executive Officer		Secretary

INDIVIDUAL FLEXIBLE PREMIUM DEFERRED VARIABLE ANNUITY CONTRACT
Investment Experience Reflected in Benefits
Variable Accumulation Before Annuity Date
Annuities Payable in Variable and Fixed Dollar Amounts
Death Benefit Proceeds Payable Before Annuity Date
Non-Participating

TABLE OF CONTENTS


	PAGE
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS		3

DEFINITION OF TERMS		4

GENERAL PROVISIONS		7

PURCHASE PAYMENTS
Initial Purchase Payment		9
Additional Purchase Payments		9
Letter of Intent		9
Purchase Payment Allocation		9
Allocations During the Right to Cancel Period		9
Minimum Investment Option Value		9

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS
Variable Investment Options		10
Separate Account		10

CONTRACT VALUES
Contract Value		11
Variable Account Value		11
Subaccount Value		11
Subaccount Unit Value		11
Net Investment Factor		11
Loan Account Value		12

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS
Administrative Fee		13
Mortality and Expense Risk Charge (“Risk Charge”)		13
Annual Fee		13
Sales Charge		13
Premium Taxes		13
Other Taxes		13

TRANSFER PROVISIONS
Transfers		14
Transfer Limitations and Restrictions		14

WITHDRAWAL PROVISIONS
Withdrawals		16
Minimum Withdrawal Amount		16
Full Withdrawal		16
Amount Available for Withdrawal		16

DEATH BENEFIT PROVISIONS
Death Benefit		17
Death Benefit Amount		17
Death of Annuitant		17
Death of Owner		18
Death of Owner Distribution Rules		18
Interest on Death Benefit Proceeds		19

BENEFICIARY PROVISIONS
Designation of Beneficiary		20
Adding or Changing Your Beneficiary		20

ANNUITY PROVISIONS
Choice of Annuity Date		21
Default Annuity Option		21
Application of Contract Value		21
Your Selections		21
Fixed and Variable Annuities		22
Amount of Payments		22
Fixed Annuity Payments		22
Conversion to Current Rates		22
Variable Annuity Payments — Subaccount Annuity Units		22
Subsequent Variable Payments		22
Annuity Unit Value		22
Periodic Payments		23

ANNUITY OPTIONS
Option 1 — Life Only		24
Option 2 — Life with Period Certain		24
Option 3 — Joint and Survivor Life		24
Option 4 — Period Certain Only		24

ANNUITY OPTION TABLES
Applicability of Rates		25
Basis of Computations		25
Rates Not Shown		25

CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS


Service Center:	Send Forms and written requests to:	Send Payments to:
	Pacific Life Insurance Company	Pacific Life Insurance Company
	P.O. Box 2378	P.O. Box 2290
	Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378	Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290


Contract Number:		[VA99999999]				Contract Date: [01-01-2007]

Owner(s):

[JOHN DOE]

[JANE DOE]

Annuitant(s):

[JOHN DOE]

Age:

[35]

Sex:

[MALE]

[JANE DOE]

[35]

[FEMALE]


Initial Purchase Payment:	[$ 10,000]

Maximum Purchase Payment:	$ 1,000,000	Annuity Date: [01-01-2067]


Investment Options
[Small-Cap Growth]	[Diversified Bond]	[Small Cap Equity]	[Large-Cap Value]
[International Value]	[Growth LT]	[Small-Cap Value]	[Comstock]
[International Small-Cap]	[Focused 30]	[Main Street Core]	[Mid-Cap Growth]
[Long/Short Large-Cap]	[Mid-Cap Value]	[Emerging Markets]	[Real Estate]
[Diversified Research]	[Large-Cap Growth]	[Managed Bond]	[Floating Rate Loan]
[American Funds Growth-Income]	[International Large-Cap]	[Inflation Managed]	[VPS Balanced Wealth
[American Funds Growth]	[Equity Index]	Money Market]	Strategy]
[Short Duration Bond]	[Small-Cap Index]	[High Yield Bond]	[Global Allocation V.I. Fund]
[Mid-Cap Equity]	[American Funds Asset	[VIP Founding Funds	[Pacific Dynamix — Growth]
[GE Investments Total Return Fund]	Allocation]	Allocation Fund]	[LIT Global Tactical Asset
[AIM V.I. PowerShares ETF Allocation Fund]	[Pacific Dynamix — Conservative Growth]	[Pacific Dynamix — Moderate Growth]	Allocation Portfolio]


	Guarantee Terms and Current Rates
DCA Plus Fixed Option	6 Mos.	[4.00%]	12 Mos.	[3.00%]
	(Minimum Guaranteed Interest Rate is 3.00% per year.)


	Charges, Fees and Deductions
Administrative Fee: 0.15%	M&E Risk Charge: 0.60%	Annual Fee: $30.00


Sales Charge Schedule
		Maximum Sales Charge
		as a Percentage of
Cumulative Value*		Purchase Payment
[Under $50,000]		[5.5%]
[$50,000 – $99,999]		[4.5%]
[$100,000 – $249,999]		[3.5%]
[$250,000 – $499,999]		[2.5%]
[$500,000 – $999,999]		[2.0%]
[$1,000,000 or more]		[0.5%]


*		Cumulative Value means the greater of the following as of the day we receive the Purchase Payment:

1.		Current Purchase Payment plus the prior Business Day’s ending Contract Value; or

2.		Total Purchase Payments minus any withdrawals.

Cumulative Value may also be increased by the amount indicated in your LOI.


Optional Riders	Annual Charge Percentage
[Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider		0.20%]

[Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit III Rider		1.05%]

FOR A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF THE CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS SHOWN ABOVE AND OTHER APPLICABLE FEES AND CHARGES, REFER TO THE CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS SECTION OF THE CONTRACT OR THE ANNUAL CHARGE PROVISION OF THE OPTIONAL RIDER(S) SHOWN ABOVE, IF ANY.

Toll-Free Number for Contract Owners: 1-800-722-4448 (between 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific Time)

Toll-Free Number for Registered Representatives: 1-800-722-2333 (between 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific Time)

Please use our toll-free number to present inquiries or obtain information about your coverage and for us to provide assistance in resolving complaints.

DEFINITION OF TERMS

Account Value — The amount of the Contract Value allocated to any one of the Investment Options.

Add-In Amount — The amount added by us, if applicable, to the Contract Value on the Notice Date to set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/designated recipient of the death benefit.

Age — The Owner’s or Annuitant’s age, as applicable, at his or her last birthday.

Annuitant — The person you name on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits and to determine the Annuity Date. If you designate Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated. If the Contract is owned by a Non-Natural Owner, you may not designate a Joint or Contingent Annuitant. Any named Annuitant, Joint Annuitant, or Contingent Annuitant must be under Age 86 as of the Contract Date. If the Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you cannot change the Annuitant or change or add a Joint Annuitant. If the Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant only on the Annuity Date.

Annuity Date (“Annuity Start Date”) — The date shown in the Contract Specifications, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant is still living and the Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Options — Income options available for a series of payments after the Annuity Date.

Beneficiary — The person you name who may receive any death benefit proceeds or any remaining annuity benefits in accordance with the provisions of this Contract.

Business Day — Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Subaccount is required to be determined by applicable law which currently includes each day that both the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading and our administrative offices are open. If any transaction or event under this Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that does not exist in a given calendar period, or on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day, unless otherwise stated.

Calendar Year — A one-year period beginning January 1 and ending December 31.

Code — The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Contingent Annuitant — The person, if any, you select to become the Annuitant if the Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date. You may add or change the Contingent Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date provided the Contingent Annuitant is not the sole surviving Annuitant. Any Contingent Annuitant you name must be under Age 86 as of the Contract Date. If you add or change a Contingent Annuitant after the Contract is issued, any newly-named or added Contingent Annuitant must be under Age 86 at the time of such change or addition. If the Contract is owned by a Non-Natural Owner, you may not designate a Contingent Annuitant.

Contingent Beneficiary — The person, if any, you select to become the Beneficiary if the Beneficiary dies.

Contract Anniversary — The same date, in each subsequent year, as the Contract Date.

Contract Date — The date we issued this Contract, as shown in the Contract Specifications. Contract Years, Contract Anniversaries, Contract Semiannual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from the Contract Date.

Contract Debt — As of the end of any Business Day, the principal amount you have outstanding on any loan under this Contract, plus any accrued and unpaid interest.

Contract Value — As of the end of any Business Day, the Contract Value is equal to the sum of the Variable Account Value plus any Loan Account Value.

General Account — The General Account consists of our assets, other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

Investment Option — A Variable Account offered under the Contract.

Loan Account Value — The amount, including any interest accrued, held in the Loan Account to secure any Contract Debt.

Net Contract Value — The Contract Value less any Contract Debt.

Net Purchase Payment — The Purchase Payment reduced by any applicable Sales Charge, premium taxes and/or other taxes.

Non-Natural Owner — A corporation or other entity that is not a (natural) person.

Non-Qualified Contract — A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.

Notice Date — The day on which we receive, in a form satisfactory to us, proof of death and instructions satisfactory to us regarding payment of death benefit proceeds.

Owner — The person(s) who has (have) all rights under this Contract. If the Contract names two Owners, Owner means both Owners (“Joint Owners”). Any named Owner must be under Age 86 as of the Contract Date. If the Contract allows you to change or add Owners after the Contract is issued, any newly-named or added Owners, including Joint Owners, must be under Age 86 at the time of such change or addition.

Primary Annuitant — The individual that is named in the Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment — An amount paid to us, by or on behalf of an Owner, as consideration for the benefits provided under this Contract.

Qualified Contract — A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity (“IRA”) or a Contract purchased under a Qualified Plan that qualifies for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan — A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401, 403, 408, 408A or 457 of the Code.

SEC — Securities and Exchange Commission.

Separate Account or Separate Account A — The Company’s Separate Account, registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (“1940 Act”).

Service Center — Our mailing address shown in the Contract Specifications. We will notify you of any change in our mailing address.

Subaccount — An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount, (a “Variable Investment Option” or “Variable Account”) invests its assets in a separate series or class of shares of a designated investment company.

Subaccount Annuity Unit (“Annuity Units”) — Annuity Units are used to measure variation in variable annuity payments. The amount of each variable annuity payment (after the first payment) will vary with the value and number of the Annuity Units in each Subaccount.

Subaccount Unit — Subaccount Units are used to measure the Variable Account Value in that Subaccount.

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Report to Owner(s) — At least once per year prior to the Annuity Date, we will provide you with a report that will show the Contract Value, any Purchase Payments received, loan repayments (if applicable), transfers, withdrawals, and/or charges and/or fees incurred since the last report, and any other information that may be required. After the Annuity Date, we will provide you with any information that may be required.

Payments, Instructions and Requests — Unless this Contract provides otherwise, all Purchase Payments, loan repayments (if applicable), instructions and requests must be received in a form satisfactory to us at our Service Center. Any subsequent Purchase Payments, loan repayments (if applicable) and requests for loans (if applicable), transfers or withdrawals received by us on any Business Day usually will be processed the same Business Day, unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day.

Generally, all other instructions and requests normally will be effective as of the end of the Business Day following the day such instructions and requests are received, in a form satisfactory to us, unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. We may require that you provide signature guarantees or other safeguards for any instruction, request or other document you may send to our Service Center. You acknowledge and agree that we will not be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense of any kind or character for acting on instructions or requests submitted to us that we reasonably believe to be genuine.

Entire Contract — This Contract, the attached application and any attached riders and endorsements, constitute the entire Contract, and supersede any and all prior agreements, whether oral or written, about the terms of this Contract and the application. All statements made in the application are representations and not warranties.

Contract Modifications — Modifications to this Contract or any waiver of our rights or requirements under this Contract can only be made if in writing by an authorized officer of the Company. This Contract is intended to qualify as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. In addition, if this Contract is a Qualified Contract, this Contract is intended to qualify as part of a Qualified Plan. To that end, the provisions of this Contract are to be interpreted and administered to ensure or maintain such tax qualification, notwithstanding any other provisions to the contrary. We reserve the right to amend this Contract without the Owner’s consent (except in those states where Owner’s consent is required) and/or our administrative procedures to reflect any clarifications that may be needed or are appropriate to maintain its tax qualification or to conform this Contract to any applicable changes in the tax qualification requirements.

Basis of Values — A detailed statement showing how values are determined has been filed with the state insurance departments. All values and reserves are at least equal to those required by the laws of the state in which this Contract is delivered.

Claims of Creditors — The Contract Value and other benefits under this Contract are exempt from the claims of creditors to the extent permitted by law.

Removal of Beneficiary or Contingent Annuitant — You may remove a Beneficiary or Contingent Annuitant from this Contract by providing written instructions satisfactory to us to our Service Center.

Ownership — This Contract belongs to the Owner. The Owner is entitled to exercise all rights available under this Contract. If this Contract names two Owners, both Owners must join in any request to exercise these rights. The Owner may exercise these rights without the consent of the Beneficiary or any other person, except as otherwise required by law.

Assignment — You may assign all rights and benefits under this Contract before the Annuity Date. We are not bound by any assignment until we have received at our Service Center written notice satisfactory to us and we record the assignment. We are not responsible for the validity of any assignment. If the Contract has been absolutely assigned, the assignee becomes the Owner. You should consult with your tax adviser to determine the tax consequences of an assignment before taking any action.

Delay of Payments — Generally, we will pay any amounts due from the Contract within seven (7) days after our receipt of the request, in a form satisfactory to us. Payments or transfers to or from a Variable Account may be delayed after our receipt of the request under certain circumstances. These include:

	•		a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular holiday or weekend;

	•		a trading restriction by the SEC; or

	•		an emergency declared by the SEC.

We may delay payments or transfers from our General Account (which would include payment of the withdrawal proceeds, loans, fixed annuity payments and lump sum death benefit payments, unless state law requires otherwise) for up to six (6) months after the requested effective date of the transaction. Any amount delayed, so long as it is held under the General Account, will earn interest at a minimum annual rate of 3%.

If you make any Purchase Payment by check, other than a cashier’s check, we may delay making payments to you until your check has cleared.

Incontestability — After this Contract has been issued, we will not contest the validity of this Contract other than for misstatement of age, sex or identity.

Misstatement of Age and/or Sex — We may require proof of the Annuitant’s or Owner’s Age and/or sex before any payments associated with the death benefit proceeds are made. If the Age and/or sex of the Annuitant or Owner is incorrectly stated, we will base any such payment associated with the death benefit proceeds on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct Age and/or sex.

We may require proof of the Annuitant’s Age and/or sex before starting annuity payments. If the Age and/or sex (or both) of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated, we will correct the amount payable, based upon the Annuitant’s correct Age and/or sex, if applicable. If we make the correction after annuity payments have started and we have made overpayments, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with interest at 3% per year, from any payments due then or later. If we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with interest at 3% per year, of the underpayments to the next payment we make after we receive proof of the correct Age and/or sex.

Proof of Life or Death — Before we make a payment, we have the right to require proof of the life or death of any person on whose life or death determines whether, to whom, or how much we must pay any benefits under this Contract.

Withholding Taxes — We reserve the right to withhold from all payments made or deemed made under this Contract, any taxes required to be withheld by applicable federal or state law, unless the Owner or payee elects otherwise pursuant to applicable withholding rules.

Non-Participating — This Contract is classified as a non-participating contract. It does not participate in our profits or surplus, and therefore no dividends are payable.

PURCHASE PAYMENTS

Initial Purchase Payment — This Contract will not be in force until we receive at our Service Center the initial Purchase Payment. The initial Purchase Payment is shown in the Contract Specifications and does not reflect the deduction of the applicable Sales Charge, any applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes.

Additional Purchase Payments — You may make additional Purchase Payments at any time before the Annuity Date, while the Annuitant is living and this Contract is in force. Each additional Purchase Payment must be at least $250 for Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts. We may limit the amount of any single Purchase Payment. A single Purchase Payment or the aggregate of all Purchase Payments may not exceed the Maximum Purchase Payment amount shown in the Contract Specifications without our approval.

Purchase Payments are payable in U.S. dollars at our Service Center. Checks should be made payable to Pacific Life Insurance Company. If you make Purchase Payments by check other than a cashier’s check, withdrawal payments and any refund under the Right to Cancel provision may be delayed until your check has cleared.

Letter of Intent (LOI) — You may commit to invest additional Purchase Payments within 13 months from the Contract Date through a LOI in order to qualify you for a lower initial Sales Charge. See the Sales Charge provision for an explanation of determining the appropriate Sales Charge when a LOI is involved.

If, after 13 months from the Contract Date, the total additional Purchase Payments received are less than the amount indicated in your LOI, we will deduct from the Contract Value an adjustment to the Sales Charge, where the adjustment is the difference between (1) and (2) below:

	(1)		the Sales Charge applicable for the amount of total additional Purchase Payments; and

	(2)		the Sales Charge assessed for the initial Purchase Payment plus the amount indicated in the LOI.

If, prior to the end of the 13^th month from the Contract Date, your Contract terminates, you annuitize your Contract or you die and the total additional Purchase Payments received are less than the amount indicated in your LOI, we will deduct from the Contract Value an adjustment to the Sales Charge, where the adjustment is the difference between (1) and (2) below:

	(1)		the Sales Charge applicable for the amount of total additional Purchase Payments received; and

	(2)		the Sales Charge assessed for the initial Purchase Payment plus the amount indicated in the LOI.

We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate this program at any time.

Purchase Payment Allocation — Prior to the Annuity Date, you may allocate all or part of your Net Purchase Payments to one or more of the Investment Options available under this Contract. The Investment Options available on the Contract Date are shown in the Contract Specifications.

You may change the Purchase Payment allocation by providing us with instructions in a form satisfactory to us. We will allocate any Net Purchase Payment according to your most recent allocation instructions. We may reject any instruction or Purchase Payment if your instructions are not clear and we cannot determine your allocation instructions.

Allocations During the Right to Cancel Period — We will allocate the initial Net Purchase Payment in accordance with your most recent allocation instructions.

Minimum Investment Option Value — We reserve the right to require that, as a result of any allocation to an Investment Option, any transfer, or any withdrawal, the remaining Account Value in any Investment Option must be at least $500.

We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account Value that does not meet such minimum amount to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions for those Investment Options.

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Variable Investment Options — The Variable Investment Options consist of Subaccounts of the Separate Account. The available Subaccounts as of the Contract Date are shown in the Contract Specifications.

Separate Account — We established the Separate Account under the laws of the state of California. The Separate Account is maintained under the laws of our state of domicile. Any income, gains or losses (whether or not realized) from the assets of each Variable Account are credited or charged against such Variable Account without regard to our other income, gains or losses. Assets may be put in our Separate Account to support this Contract and other variable annuity contracts. Assets may be put in our Separate Account for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. The assets of our Separate Account are our property. The portion of the Separate Account assets equal to the reserves and other Contract liabilities with respect to each Variable Account will not be chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business we conduct. We may transfer assets of a separate account in excess of the reserves and other liabilities with respect to its Variable Accounts to another separate account or to our General Account. All obligations arising under the Contract are our general corporate obligations. We do not hold ourselves out to be trustees of the Separate Account assets.

We reserve the right, subject to compliance with the law then in effect, and after any required regulatory approval, to:

	•		cease offering any Subaccount;

	•		add or change designated investment companies or their portfolios, or other investment vehicles;

	•		add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any Variable Account;

	•		permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;

	•		add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;

	•		combine the assets of any Variable Account with any of our other Separate Accounts or of any of our affiliates;

	•		register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable Account under the 1940 Act;

	•		operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;

	•		run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee, board, or other group;

	•		restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights as to any Variable Account;

	•		make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal securities laws;

	•		make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the Contracts as annuities under the Code;

	•		make other changes required under federal or state law relating to annuities;

	•		suspend or discontinue sale of the Contracts; and

	•		comply with applicable law.

If any of these changes result in a material change in the underlying investments of a Variable Account, we will notify you of such change.

We will not change the investment policy of the Separate Account without following the filing and other procedures of the insurance supervisory official of our state of domicile and the filing and other procedures established by insurance regulators of the state of delivery. Unless required by law or regulation, an investment policy may not be changed without our consent.

From time to time we may make other Investment Options available to you. Any new Investment Option may invest in portfolios of the designated investment company, other designated investment companies or their portfolios, or in other investment vehicles. New Investment Options will be made available to existing Owners at our discretion. We will provide you with written notice of all material details, including investment objectives and charges. We will comply with the filing or other procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators, to the extent required by applicable law.

CONTRACT VALUES

Contract Value — The Contract Value on any Business Day is the sum of:

	•		the Variable Account Value; plus

	•		the Loan Account Value.

We generally determine values on each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open, provided our administrative offices are also open on that day.

If no Purchase Payments have been received during the preceding three-year period and the Contract Value is below $1,000 and there are no optional riders in effect, we reserve the right to pay the Owner the Net Contract Value as a lump sum.

Variable Account Value — The Variable Account Value on any Business Day is the sum of the Subaccount Values on that day.

Subaccount Value — Each Subaccount Value on any Business Day is equal to the number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount multiplied by the Unit Value of the Subaccount on that day.

We credit the Subaccount with Subaccount Units as a result of any:

	•		Purchase Payments received by us, reduced by any applicable Sales Charge, premium taxes and/or other taxes, and allocated to that Subaccount;

	•		transfers to that Subaccount, including transfers from the Loan Account; and

	•		additional amounts allocated to that Subaccount.

We debit the Subaccount with Subaccount Units as a result of any:

	•		transfers from that Subaccount, including transfers to the Loan Account;

	•		withdrawals;

	•		amounts applied to provide for annuity payments;

	•		annual fees;

	•		annual charges for expenses relating to optional benefit riders attached to the Contract; and

	•		charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

The number of Subaccount Units we credit to, or debit from, a Subaccount in connection with a transaction is equal to the amount of the transaction applicable to that Subaccount divided by that Subaccount’s Unit Value at the end of the valuation period that includes that day. The number of Subaccount Units in a Subaccount will change only if we credit or debit Subaccount Units for the transactions specified above. The number of Subaccount Units will not change because of subsequent changes in the Subaccount Unit Value.

Subaccount Unit Value — The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each subsequent Business Day, the Unit Value for each Subaccount is equal to (Y) times (Z), where:

	(Y)		is the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the prior Business Day; and

	(Z)		is the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between the prior Business Day and that Business Day.

Net Investment Factor — Each Subaccount’s Net Investment Factor for any valuation period is equal to (A / B) — C, where:

(A)

equals:

(a)

the net asset value per share of the corresponding portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period; plus

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Administrative Fee — We charge an administrative fee against the assets held in the Variable Investment Option(s). This fee is assessed daily at the annual rate which is shown in the Contract Specifications. This fee is guaranteed not to increase.

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge (“Risk Charge”) — We impose a Risk Charge against the assets held in the Variable Investment Option(s). This charge is assessed daily at the annual rate which is shown in the Contract Specifications. The Risk Charge compensates us for the risks we assume that mortality and expenses will vary from those we assumed. This charge is guaranteed not to increase.

Annual Fee — We charge an annual fee against the Contract Value on each Contract Anniversary prior to the Annuity Date, and at the time you withdraw the entire Net Contract Value (on a prorated basis for the current Contract Year). The annual fee is shown in the Contract Specifications. This fee is guaranteed not to increase. The annual fee is waived if, on any Contract Anniversary prior to the Annuity Date, or at the time you make a full withdrawal, the Net Contract Value is $50,000 or more on that day.

We will not impose the annual fee on amounts applied to provide an annuity or on payment of the death benefit proceeds.

Sales Charge — A sales charge will be assessed on each Purchase Payment made to the Contract. The sales charge percentages schedule is set forth in the Contract Specifications. The applicable charge will be deducted from each Purchase Payment at the time a Purchase Payment is made to the Contract. The amount of the initial charge is based on the applicable percentage of the sum of (1) and (2) where:

	(1)		is the initial Purchase Payments received; plus

	(2)		the amount indicated in any LOI.

For subsequent Purchase Payments made, the sales charge for each additional Purchase Payment will be based on the applicable percentage for the greater of (1) or (2) below:

	(1)		the amount of the additional Purchase Payment received plus the ending Contract Value for the Business Day prior to the date we receive the additional Purchase Payment; or

	(2)		Total Purchase Payments received minus any withdrawals.

For purposes of determining the Sales Charge, the LOI will no longer apply in the charge calculation once we receive a subsequent Purchase Payment that satisfies or exceeds the amount indicated in the LOI.

Premium Taxes — From the Contract Value, we will deduct a charge for any taxes we pay that are attributable to Purchase Payments or withdrawals. Such taxes may include, but are not limited to: any federal, state or local premium or retaliatory taxes; and any federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof), measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Purchase Payments we receive from you. We will normally deduct this charge upon annuitization. However, we may impose this charge on any withdrawal, at the time any death benefit is paid, when the taxes are incurred or when we pay the taxes. We will base this charge on the Contract Value, the amount of the transaction, the aggregate amount of Purchase Payments we receive under the Contract; or any other amount that, in our sole discretion, we deem appropriately reimburses us for premium taxes paid on this Contract.

Other Taxes — We reserve the right to charge the Separate Account and/or deduct from the Contract Value a charge for any federal, state or local taxes we pay that are or become attributable to the Separate Account or Contract, including, but not limited to, income taxes attributable to our operation of the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments or payments we make under this Contract.

TRANSFER PROVISIONS

Transfers — You may, on or before the Annuity Date and subject to the requirements, limitations and restrictions described in this section, transfer all or part of the Contract Value, less any Loan Account Value, in any Investment Option among other Investment Options, while the Annuitant is living and the Contract is in force.

Your transfer request must specify:

	(a)		the Investment Option (the “source account”) from which the transfer is to be made. You may choose one or more Investment Options as your source account(s). Your source account may not also be a target account;

	(b)		the amount of the transfer. The amount of the transfer may be specified as a dollar amount or a percentage of the source Account Value. If you select more than one source account, the amount of the transfer from each source account must be at least the lesser of either $250 or the full source Account Value; and

	(c)		the Investment Option (the “target account”) to receive the transferred amount. You may choose one or more Investment Options as your target account(s). If you select more than one target account, your request must specify how the transferred amounts are to be allocated among the target accounts. Your source account may not also be a target account.

Transfers among Investment Options will normally be effective as of the end of the Business Day the transfer request, in a form satisfactory to us, is received at our Service Center.

Transfer Limitations and Restrictions — The following limitations and restrictions apply to transfers among Investment Options:

	(a)		Transfers are allowed thirty (30) days after the Contract Date.

	(b)		Transfers are limited to twenty-five (25) transfers during each Calendar Year and only two (2) per month, into or out, that affect any international Investment Options. For the purpose of applying this limitation, transfers that occur on the same day are considered one transfer and transfers that occur as a result of any systematic transfer option are excluded from the maximum twenty-five (25) transfers per Calendar Year limitation.

	(c)		Transfers to or from an Investment Option cannot be made until the eighth (8^th) calendar day (provided that day is a Business Day) from the last day of the most recent transfer to or from that Investment Option. The day of the most recent transfer is considered as the first (1^st) calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. Transfers that occur as a result of any systematic transfer option are excluded from this requirement.

	(d)		If a transfer reduces the remaining Account Value in any Investment Option immediately after such transfer to an amount less than $500, we reserve the right to transfer such remaining Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

	(e)		We further reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:

	(i)		not accepting transfer instructions from an individual or entity acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner; and

	(ii)		not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

(f)

We further reserve the right to modify the limits described in subparagraphs (a) through (e) above or to impose, without prior notice, other limitations and restrictions on transfers or exchanges that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of

WITHDRAWAL PROVISIONS

Withdrawals — You may, on or before the Annuity Date and subject to the requirements, limitations and restrictions described in this section, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under this Contract, while the Annuitant is living and the Contract is in force. However, no withdrawals are allowed within thirty (30) days of the Contract Date.

You may specify that the withdrawal be taken from a specific Investment Option(s) or pro rata from all Investment Options. If your request does not specify the Investment Option(s) from which the withdrawal is to be made, the withdrawal will be taken pro rata from all Investment Options relative to the Account Value in each option.

Withdrawals will normally be effective as of the end of the Business Day the withdrawal request, in a form satisfactory to us, is received at our Service Center.

Minimum Withdrawal Amount — The minimum amount that may be withdrawn is $500. If the withdrawal reduces the Account Value in any Investment Option to an amount less than $500, we reserve the right to transfer such remaining Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If the withdrawal reduces the Net Contract Value to an amount less than $1,000, we may terminate this Contract and pay you the withdrawal proceeds (see Full Withdrawal provision). We will not terminate the Contract if you own an optional rider and a withdrawal reduces the Net Contract Value to an amount less than $1,000. Payment of the withdrawal proceeds will end this Contract and we will have no further obligations under the Contract.

Full Withdrawal — You may, on or before the Annuity Date, make a full withdrawal under this Contract for its withdrawal proceeds, while the Annuitant is living and the Contract is in force. A full withdrawal will terminate the Contract. We will require the return of this Contract or a signed Lost Contract Affidavit with your request. Your request for a full withdrawal will normally be effective as of the end of the Business Day such request, in a form satisfactory to us, is received at our Service Center. Payment of the withdrawal proceeds will end this Contract and we will have no further obligations under the Contract.

If you have a LOI and you choose to make a full withdrawal within 13 months of the Contract Date and the total additional Purchase Payments received are less than the amount indicated in your LOI, we will pay you the Net Contract Value as of the end of the Business Day on which the withdrawal request is effective, less:

	•		the difference between (1) and (2) where (1) is the Sales Charge applicable for the amount of total Purchase Payments received and (2) is the Sales Charge assessed for the initial Purchase Payment plus the amount indicated in the LOI;

	•		charges for annual fees (on a prorated basis for the current Contract Year);

	•		charges for expenses relating to optional riders attached to the Contract; and

	•		charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

The amount we send you (the “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and/or state income tax withholding.

If you choose to make a full withdrawal after the end of 13 months from the Contract Date, or if you did not send us a LOI, we will pay you the withdrawal proceeds as determined under the Amount Available for Withdrawal provision.

Amount Available for Withdrawal — The amount available for withdrawal is the Net Contract Value as of the end of the Business Day on which the withdrawal request is effective, less any:

	•		charges for expenses relating to optional riders attached to the Contract

	•		charges for annual fees (on a prorated basis for the current Contract Year); and

	•		charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

The amount we send you (the “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and/or state income tax withholding.

DEATH BENEFIT PROVISIONS

Death Benefit — A death benefit will be payable only if the sole surviving Annuitant or any Owner dies before the Annuity Date and while this Contract is in force.

The proceeds of any death benefit will be payable upon receipt of, in a form satisfactory to us, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of the death benefit proceeds (the “Notice Date”). Such proceeds will equal the Death Benefit Amount reduced by any:

	•		Contract Debt; and

	•		charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if proceeds are used to purchase an Annuity Option from us.

These proceeds may be payable in a lump sum, as periodic payments under an Annuity Option available under this Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in accordance with the Code (see Death of Owner Distribution Rules).

If there are multiple Beneficiaries, the Death Benefit Amount will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, in proper form, from any Beneficiary. Any Death Benefit Amount still remaining to be paid to any other Beneficiary will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

Death Benefit Amount — The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day prior to the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:

	(a)		the Contract Value as of that day; or

	(b)		the aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received prior to each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

Death of Annuitant — If the Annuitant dies before the Owner and before the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date. Unless there is a surviving Joint Annuitant or Contingent Annuitant, we will pay the death benefit proceeds to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds; following the death of the sole surviving Annuitant:

	(a)		the Owner;

	(b)		the Joint Owner;

	(c)		the Beneficiary; or

	(d)		the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), we will pay the death benefit proceeds to the Owner’s estate.

If an Annuitant dies and there is a surviving Joint Annuitant, the surviving Joint Annuitant becomes the Annuitant. If there is no surviving Joint Annuitant and there is a Contingent Annuitant, the Contingent Annuitant becomes the Annuitant. No death benefit will be paid, except as otherwise provided under the Death Benefit provision.

If you are the Annuitant and you die, we will determine the amount of any death benefit and to whom it will be paid under this Death of Annuitant provision. If the Contract is issued as a Non-Qualified Contract, we will distribute any death benefit proceeds under the Death of Owner Distribution Rules provision.

Death of Owner — If you are not the Annuitant and you die before the Annuitant and before the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

If you die while the Annuitant is living and prior to the Annuity Date, we will pay the death benefit proceeds to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds:

	(a)		the Joint Owner;

	(b)		the Beneficiary; or

	(c)		the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), we will pay the death benefit proceeds to your estate.

Death of Owner Distribution Rules — The following rules will determine when a distribution must be made under this Contract. These rules do not affect our determination of the amount of death benefit proceeds payable or distribution proceeds. If there is more than one Owner, these rules apply on the date on which the first of these Joint Owners die.

If the Owner dies before the Annuity Date, the designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds may elect to receive the death benefit proceeds:

•

in a lump sum payment;

•

within five (5) years following the Owner’s death; or

•

in the form of an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient, with annuity payments that start within one (1) year after the Owner’s death.

Unless otherwise required by law, an election to receive an annuity (in lieu of a lump sum payment) must be made within such time frames as we may prescribe from time to time, or the lump sum payment option will be deemed elected. We will consider that deemed election as our receipt of instructions regarding payment of the death benefit proceeds.

The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary is to receive the death benefit proceeds either through an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the Beneficiary. Such designation must be made in writing in a form acceptable to us, and may only be revoked by the Owner in writing in a form acceptable to us. Upon death of the Owner, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify any designation made by the Owner on how the death benefit proceeds are to be paid.

If the spouse of the deceased Owner is the sole surviving Beneficiary, or is the sole surviving Joint Owner, and has an unrestricted right to receive the death benefit proceeds in a lump sum, the spouse may continue this Contract as Owner rather than receive the death benefit proceeds, provided that we receive instructions to continue the Contract within such time frames as we may prescribe from time to time.

On the Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/designated recipient of the death benefit. The amount that the Death Benefit Amount exceeds the Contract Value will be added to the Contract Value in the form of the Add-In Amount on the Notice Date. The Add-In Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and will be considered earnings. There will not be an adjustment to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under this Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the rate that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the contract:

	(a)		the Joint Owner;

	(b)		the Beneficiary; or

	(c)		the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

This Contract incorporates all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify this Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes, including the requirement that, if the Owner dies before the Annuity Date, any death benefit proceeds under this Contract shall be distributed within five (5) years of the Owner’s death (or such other period that we offer and that is permitted under the Code or such shorter period as we may require).

These Death of Owner Distribution Rules do not apply to Qualified Contracts issued under Qualified Plans as defined in Section 401, 403, 408 or 408A of the Code or to an annuity that is a qualified funding asset as defined in Code Section 130(d) (but without regard to whether there is a qualified assignment).

Interest on Death Benefit Proceeds — We will pay interest on the death benefit proceeds. Generally, interest will be paid at a rate of not less than 3% per year from the date of death until such proceeds are paid or applied under an Annuity Option.

BENEFICIARY PROVISIONS

Designation of Beneficiary — The Beneficiary is the person you name who may receive any death benefit proceeds, or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date, if the Annuitant or Owner dies. The Owner can name more than one Beneficiary. Multiple Beneficiaries will share the death benefit proceeds (or any remaining annuity payments) equally, unless otherwise specified. If any Beneficiary predeceases the Annuitant or Owner, that Beneficiary’s interest will go to any other Beneficiaries named, according to their respective interests, unless otherwise specified. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary, your estate may receive the death benefit proceeds.

If the Beneficiary is a trustee, we will neither be responsible for verifying a trustee’s right to receive any death benefit proceeds, nor for how the trustee disposes of any death benefit proceeds. If before payment of any death benefit proceeds, we receive proper notice that the trust has been revoked or is not in effect, then any death benefit proceeds payable will be paid to the Contingent Beneficiary, if living; if not to the Owner’s estate.

Adding or Changing Your Beneficiary — You may add, change, or remove any Beneficiary, subject to the terms of any assignment, at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, by providing us with a request in a form satisfactory to us. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents and record the change or addition. Any such change or addition will not impact any payment made or other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded by us at our Service Center.

ANNUITY PROVISIONS

Choice of Annuity Date — Unless otherwise changed as provided below, the Annuity Date is shown in the Contract Specifications. We assigned the Annuity Date based on the Contract type chosen and the Annuitant’s Age shown in the application for this Contract. If there are Joint Annuitants, the Annuity Date was based on the younger Annuitant’s birthday.

The Annuity Date may be changed by providing proper notice to us at least ten (10) Business Days prior to the current Annuity Date or new Annuity Date, whichever is earlier, subject to any applicable state law or the Code.

The new Annuity Date may not be earlier than the first Contract Anniversary and must occur on or before the day the Annuitant reaches his or her 95th birthday, or earlier, as required by any applicable state law or the Code. If there are Joint Annuitants, the Annuity Date will be based on the younger Annuitant’s birthday. You may be subject to additional restrictions under your Qualified Plan. You should consult with your Qualified Plan administrator before you elect an Annuity Date.

Default Annuity Option — For all Non-Qualified Contracts and those Qualified Contracts where the Annuitant is not married, the Annuity Option will be Life with a Period Certain of Ten (10) Years. If this is a Qualified Contract and you are married, the Annuity Option will be Joint and Survivor Life, with survivor payments of 100%, and your spouse will automatically be named as the secondary Annuitant.

The Annuity Option may be changed by providing proper notice to us at least ten (10) Business Days prior to the current Annuity Date, to any other Annuity Option contained in this Contract or allowed by us.

Unless otherwise specified or changed, we will make annuity payments based on our most frequent payment schedule that results in an initial annuity payment of at least $250. The payment frequency may be changed by providing proper notice to us at least ten (10) Business Days prior to the current Annuity Date.

Subject to our minimum requirements, the Net Contract Value less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes will be converted to a fixed annuity payout option on the Annuity Date.

Application of Contract Value — Prior to the Annuity Date, you may elect to convert all or part of the Net Contract Value less any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to any currently offered Annuity Option. The aggregate net amount you convert must be at least $10,000; otherwise, we reserve the right to terminate this Contract and pay a single amount equal to the withdrawal proceeds as determined under the Amount Available for Withdrawal provision.

Subject to the Withdrawal Provisions, you may also elect a full withdrawal in lieu of annuity payments under an Annuity Option. Before we make any full withdrawal, we require return of this Contract (or a signed Lost Contract Affidavit) to us.

If you convert only a portion of the Net Contract Value on the Annuity Date, you may, at that time, elect not to have the remainder of the Net Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue the Contract with that remaining Contract Value. This option may or may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. If this option is available and you elect it, you would choose a second Annuity Date for such Contract Value. All references in this Contract to the Annuity Start Date (or Annuity Date) would, with regard to such Contract Value, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. The second Annuity Date may not be after the Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. You should consult with your tax adviser for more information if you desire this option.

Your Selections — Prior to the Annuity Date, you may make three selections about the annuity payments. First, you may choose whether you want those payments to be a fixed-dollar amount or a variable-dollar amount, or both. Second, you may choose the form of annuity payments (Annuity Option). Third, you may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semiannually, or annually.

The first annuity payment will be sent on the day following the Annuity Date and must be at least $250. We may reduce the payment frequency if the first annuity payment is less than $250. If you elect annuity payments for a Period Certain Only, we also reserve the right to reduce the Period Certain to meet the $250 minimum first payment.

Once annuity payments begin, no changes can be made to either the Annuity Option or the basis on which such payments are made (a fixed annuity basis or variable annuity basis), no additional purchase payments will be accepted and no withdrawals will be allowed.

Fixed and Variable Annuities — You may choose a fixed annuity (with fixed-dollar payments), a variable annuity (with variable-dollar payments), or you may choose a combination of both. If you select a variable annuity, you may choose any Subaccounts for the annuity. If you select a variable annuity, on the Annuity Date, we will convert that portion of the Net Contract Value as it is currently allocated among the Subaccount(s). We will apply the net amount you convert to a fixed annuity and/or a variable annuity (and in this instance, to each Subaccount), based on the relative Account Value in each Investment Option on the Annuity Date. Any net amount you convert to a fixed annuity will be held in our General Account.

Each periodic payment under the fixed annuity will be equal to the amount of the first fixed annuity payment (unless you elect a joint and survivor life annuity with reduced survivor payments). The amount of each variable annuity periodic payment will vary with the investment results of the Subaccount(s) you select. After the Annuity Date, you may exchange the Annuity Units in any Subaccount(s) for Annuity Units in any other Subaccount(s) up to four (4) times in any twelve (12) month period. We reserve the right to limit the Subaccounts available, to change the number and frequency of exchanges and to change the number of Subaccounts you may choose.

Amount of Payments — The first annuity payment amount depends on the Annuity Option, payment frequency, and whether you select a fixed annuity and/or a variable annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only Option, the amount will depend on the Age of the Annuitant(s), the Annuity Date, and the sex of the Annuitant(s), unless unisex factors apply.

Fixed Annuity Payments — The minimum guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to a fixed annuity is based on an annual interest rate of 3% and the 1983a Mortality Table with the ages set back ten (10) years.

Conversion to Current Rates — Annuity payments will be based on the greater of:

	*		our current income factors in effect for this Contract on the Annuity Date; or

	*		our guaranteed income factors set forth in this Contract.

The dollar amount of any payments after the first annuity payment is specified during the annuity payment period according to the provisions of the elected Annuity Option.

Variable Annuity Payments — Subaccount Annuity Units. For each Subaccount, we divide the amount of the initial variable annuity payment from each Subaccount by the Annuity Unit Value for that Subaccount (the “Annuity Unit Value”) on the Annuity Date, to obtain the number of Annuity Units for that Subaccount. The number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount will not change unless exchanges of Annuity Units are made (or if the Joint and Survivor Annuity Option is elected and the Primary Annuitant dies first), but the Annuity Unit Value of those Annuity Units will vary.

Subsequent Variable Payments — The amount of each subsequent variable annuity payment will be the sum of the amounts payable based on the Annuity Units in each Subaccount. To determine the amount payable for each Subaccount, we multiply the number of Annuity Units in that Subaccount by their Annuity Unit Value on the day in each payment period that corresponds to the Annuity Date.

Annuity Unit Value — The initial Annuity Unit Value for each Subaccount was arbitrarily set at $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each subsequent Business Day, the Annuity Unit Value for each Subaccount is equal to (A x B) x C, where:

	A	— is the Subaccount’s Annuity Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the prior Business Day;

	B	— is the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for that valuation period; and

ANNUITY OPTIONS

The following Annuity Options are available under this Contract. Additional options may become available in the future:

Option 1 — Life Only: Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.

Option 2 — Life with Period Certain: Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed five (5) through thirty (30) years (in full years only). If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity entitled to receive the remainder of guaranteed payments:

	(a)		the Owner;

	(b)		the Joint Owner;

	(c)		the Beneficiary; or

	(d)		the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Annuitant dies after all of the payments under the period certain have been paid, payments will stop when the Annuitant dies.

Additionally, if variable payments are elected under this option, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. The amount available upon such redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return.

Option 3 — Joint and Survivor Life: Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments are based on the life of the secondary Annuitant named in the election if and so long as such secondary Annuitant lives. Payments made based on the life of the secondary Annuitant may be in installments equal to 50%, 66-2/3% or 100% (as specified in the election) of the original payment amount payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 66-2/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. Variable annuity payments will be determined using 50% or 66-2/3%, as applicable, of the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount credited to the Contract. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.

Option 4 — Period Certain Only: Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed five (5) through thirty (30) years (in full years only). If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:

	(a)		the Owner;

	(b)		the Joint Owner;

	(c)		the Beneficiary; or

	(d)		the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

ANNUITY OPTION TABLES

Applicability of Rates — For the fixed Annuity Option, the Annuity Option Tables contained in the following pages illustrate the minimum guaranteed monthly income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied.

The tables also illustrate the minimum rates for the first monthly variable annuity payment per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the variable annuity payment option. Subsequent payments may be higher or lower than the first payment, based on the investment performance of the Subaccount(s) you elect and whether you exchange Subaccount Annuity Units.

For some Qualified Plans and in some states, the use of sex-distinct income factors are prohibited. For those Qualified Plans, we use blended unisex income factors for life payment options for both male and female Annuitants.

Basis of Computations — The actuarial basis for the fixed Annuity Option Tables is the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back ten (10) years with interest at an annual rate of 3%. The rates for variable annuity payments are based on an assumed investment return of 5% per year and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back ten (10) years.

Rates Not Shown — Any rates and/or ages not shown in the tables contained in this Contract will be provided by the Company upon request.

OPTIONS 1 AND 2
LIFE ONLY OR LIFE WITH GUARANTEED PERIOD CERTAIN OF 10 AND 20 YEARS


Fixed Annuity Rates
	Male at 3%						Female at 3%						Unisex at 3%
			Life with						Life with						Life with
			Guaranteed						Guaranteed						Guaranteed
	Life		Period Certain				Life		Period Certain				Life		Period Certain
Age	Only		10 Yr.		20 Yr.		Only		10 Yr.		20 Yr.		Only		10 Yr.		20 Yr.
30		3.04		3.03		3.03		2.93		2.93		2.93		2.99		2.98		2.98
35		3.14		3.14		3.13		3.02		3.02		3.01		3.08		3.08		3.07
40		3.28		3.27		3.26		3.13		3.12		3.12		3.20		3.20		3.19
45		3.44		3.44		3.41		3.26		3.26		3.24		3.35		3.35		3.33
50		3.66		3.64		3.60		3.42		3.42		3.40		3.54		3.54		3.50
55		3.93		3.90		3.82		3.63		3.63		3.59		3.78		3.77		3.71
60		4.27		4.22		4.08		3.90		3.89		3.82		4.09		4.06		3.96
65		4.70		4.62		4.39		4.25		4.22		4.11		4.48		4.43		4.25
70		5.28		5.14		4.71		4.72		4.66		4.44		5.00		4.90		4.58
75		6.10		5.81		5.02		5.35		5.22		4.79		5.73		5.52		4.92
80		7.23		6.61		5.27		6.25		5.96		5.12		6.74		6.30		5.20
85		8.82		7.49		5.42		7.56		6.89		5.35		8.18		7.20		5.39
90		11.06		8.33		5.49		9.53		7.89		5.47		10.28		8.12		5.48
95		14.16		8.97		5.51		12.48		8.74		5.50		13.30		8.86		5.51


Variable Annuity Rates
	Male at 5%						Female at 5%						Unisex at 5%
			Life with						Life with						Life with
			Guaranteed						Guaranteed						Guaranteed
	Life		Period Certain				Life		Period Certain				Life		Period Certain
Age	Only		10 Yr.		20 Yr.		Only		10 Yr.		20 Yr.		Only		10 Yr.		20 Yr.
30		4.38		4.37		4.36		4.29		4.29		4.29		4.34		4.33		4.33
35		4.46		4.46		4.44		4.36		4.35		4.35		4.41		4.41		4.40
40		4.57		4.56		4.54		4.44		4.44		4.42		4.51		4.50		4.49
45		4.71		4.70		4.67		4.55		4.54		4.52		4.63		4.62		4.60
50		4.91		4.89		4.82		4.69		4.68		4.65		4.80		4.78		4.74
55		5.16		5.12		5.02		4.87		4.86		4.81		5.02		4.99		4.92
60		5.48		5.41		5.24		5.12		5.09		5.01		5.30		5.26		5.13
65		5.89		5.79		5.51		5.44		5.40		5.26		5.67		5.60		5.39
70		6.46		6.28		5.80		5.89		5.80		5.55		6.18		6.05		5.68
75		7.27		6.91		6.08		6.51		6.34		5.87		6.89		6.64		5.98
80		8.41		7.68		6.29		7.39		7.05		6.16		7.90		7.38		6.23
85		10.02		8.52		6.43		8.72		7.93		6.37		9.36		8.24		6.40
90		12.29		9.30		6.49		10.71		8.88		6.47		11.49		9.10		6.48
95		15.42		9.90		6.51		13.70		9.68		6.50		14.55		9.80		6.51

OPTION 3 — JOINT AND 50% SURVIVOR LIFE

Primary Annuitant
Male Age


		60				65				70				75				80				85
		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%
		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable
Female Age	60		3.91		5.12		4.13		5.34		4.39		5.60		4.69		5.92		5.02		6.30		5.38		6.73
	65		3.99		5.19		4.25		5.43		4.54		5.73		4.88		6.09		5.26		6.51		5.67		6.98
	70		4.06		5.25		4.36		5.53		4.70		5.87		5.10		6.27		5.55		6.75		6.03		7.29
	75		4.12		5.31		4.46		5.62		4.85		6.00		5.32		6.47		5.86		7.03		6.45		7.66
	80		4.17		5.36		4.54		5.70		4.98		6.13		5.54		6.67		6.18		7.33		6.91		8.08
	85		4.21		5.40		4.60		5.77		5.09		6.24		5.72		6.86		6.49		7.63		7.40		8.54

Primary Annuitant
Unisex Age


		60				65				70				75				80				85
		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%
		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable
Unisex Age	60		3.84		5.05		4.07		5.27		4.34		5.54		4.65		5.86		5.00		6.24		5.39		6.69
	65		3.90		5.10		4.17		5.35		4.47		5.65		4.83		6.01		5.23		6.44		5.68		6.94
	70		3.96		5.15		4.25		5.43		4.60		5.76		5.02		6.17		5.49		6.66		6.03		7.24
	75		4.00		5.19		4.32		5.49		4.72		5.87		5.20		6.34		5.76		6.91		6.41		7.58
	80		4.03		5.23		4.38		5.55		4.81		5.96		5.36		6.49		6.02		7.15		6.81		7.96
	85		4.05		5.25		4.42		5.59		4.88		6.04		5.49		6.62		6.25		7.38		7.20		8.33

OPTION 3 — JOINT AND 66 2/3% SURVIVOR LIFE

Primary Annuitant
Male Age


		60				65				70				75				80				85
		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%
		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable
Female Age	60		3.80		5.01		3.97		5.18		4.16		5.36		4.35		5.58		4.55		5.81		4.76		6.06
	65		3.90		5.10		4.12		5.30		4.34		5.52		4.58		5.77		4.83		6.05		5.07		6.34
	70		4.00		5.18		4.25		5.42		4.53		5.69		4.84		6.00		5.15		6.33		5.46		6.68
	75		4.08		5.26		4.38		5.54		4.72		5.87		5.11		6.25		5.51		6.66		5.92		7.10
	80		4.14		5.33		4.48		5.64		4.89		6.03		5.37		6.50		5.90		7.03		6.45		7.59
	85		4.19		5.38		4.56		5.73		5.03		6.17		5.61		6.73		6.28		7.39		7.02		8.14

OPTION 3 — JOINT AND 100% SURVIVOR LIFE

Primary Annuitant
Male Age


		60				65				70				75				80				85
		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%		3%		5%
		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable		Fixed		Variable
Female Age	60		3.60		4.80		3.69		4.88		3.76		4.94		3.81		5.00		3.84		5.04		3.87		5.06
	65		3.75		4.93		3.88		5.04		3.99		5.15		4.07		5.23		4.14		5.30		4.18		5.35
	70		3.88		5.05		4.06		5.21		4.24		5.37		4.38		5.52		4.50		5.63		4.58		5.72
	75		3.99		5.16		4.23		5.38		4.49		5.61		4.72		5.83		4.93		6.03		5.08		6.19
	80		4.08		5.25		4.38		5.52		4.72		5.83		5.07		6.17		5.40		6.49		5.68		6.77
	85		4.15		5.33		4.50		5.65		4.91		6.03		5.39		6.49		5.89		6.97		6.37		7.44


REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933		x
Pre-Effective Amendment No.		o




Post-Effective Amendment No.

	o


REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940		x



Amendment No. 242		x


o		this post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a previously filed post-effective amendment.


PART B

Item No.		Statement of Additional Information Heading

15.	Cover Page	Cover Page

16.	Table of Contents	TABLE OF CONTENTS

17.	General Information and History	Not Applicable

18.	Services	Not Applicable

19.	Purchase of Securities Being Offered	THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT — Calculating Subaccount Unit Values, — Systematic Transfer programs

20.	Underwriters	DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS — Pacific Select Distributors, Inc.

21.	Calculation of Performance Data	PERFORMANCE

22.	Annuity Payments	THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT — Variable Annuity Payment Amounts

23.	Financial Statements	FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


An Overview of Pacific Destinations		3


Your Investment Options		11
Your Variable Investment Options		11
Your Fixed Option		14


Purchasing Your Contract		14
How to Apply for Your Contract		14
Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)		15


How Your Purchase Payments are Allocated		15
Choosing Your Investment Options		15
Portfolio Optimization		16
Custom Model		19
Investing in Variable Investment Options		20
When Your Purchase Payment is Effective		21
Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions		21
Systematic Transfer Options		22


Charges, Fees and Deductions		23
Sales Charge		23
Mortality and Expense Risk Charge		24
Administrative Fee		24
Annual Fee		24
Optional Rider Charges		24
Premium Taxes		25
Waivers and Reduced Charges		25
Fund Expenses		25


Annuitization		25
Selecting Your Annuitant		25
Annuitization		26
Choosing Your Annuity Date		26
Default Annuity Date and Options		26
Choosing Your Annuity Option		27
Your Annuity Payments		28


Death Benefits and Optional Death Benefit Riders		28
Death Benefits		28
Optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)		31


Withdrawals		32
Optional Withdrawals		32
Tax Consequences of Withdrawals		33
Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)		33


Other Optional Riders		34
General Information		34
Automatic Income Builder Rider		35


Pacific Life and the Separate Account		40
Pacific Life		40
Separate Account A		41
Financial Highlights		42


Federal Tax Issues		42
Taxation of Annuities - General Provisions		42
Non-Qualified Contracts - General Rules		42
Impact of Federal Income Taxes		45
Taxes on Pacific Life		45
Qualified Contracts - General Rules		46
IRAs and Qualified Plans		48


Additional Information		50
Voting Rights		50
Changes to Your Contract		51
Changes to All Contracts		51
Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests		52
Telephone and Electronic Transactions		53
Electronic Information Consent		53
Timing of Payments and Transactions		54
Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners		54
Distribution Arrangements		54
Service Arrangements		55
Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities		55
State Considerations		55
Financial Statements		56


The General Account		56
General Information		56
DCA Plus Fixed Option		57


Terms Used in This Prospectus		59


Contents of the Statement of Additional Information		61


Appendix A: Automatic Income Builder Rider Sample Calculations		62


Appendix B: Death Benefit Amount and Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR) Sample Calculations		68


Where to Go for More Information		Back Cover


	Page No.

PERFORMANCE		1
Total Returns		1
Yields		2
Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks		3
Power of Tax Deferral		4

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS		5
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)		5

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT		7
Calculating Subaccount Unit Values		7
Variable Annuity Payment Amounts		7
Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Options 2 and 4		9
Corresponding Dates		10
Age and Sex of Annuitant		10
Systematic Transfer Programs		10
Pre-Authorized Withdrawals		12
Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts		13
More on Federal Tax Issues		13
Safekeeping of Assets		16

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS		16

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS		16


1.	(a)	Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Depositor authorizing establishment of Separate Account A and Memorandum establishing Separate Account A.¹

	(b)	Memorandum Establishing Two New Variable Accounts — Aggressive Equity and Emerging Markets Portfolios.¹

	(c)	Resolution of the Board of Directors of Pacific Life Insurance Company authorizing conformity to the terms of the current Bylaws.²



10.		Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm and Consent of Independent Auditors [TO BE FILED]


11.		Not applicable

12.		Not applicable


13.		Powers of Attorney

¹		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4, File No. 33-88460, Accession No. 0000898430-96-001377 filed on April 19, 1996, and incorporated by reference herein.

²		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4, File No. 33-88460, Accession No. 0001017062-98-000945 filed on April 29, 1998, and incorporated by reference herein.

³		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 33-88460, Accession No. 0001017062-01-500083 filed on April 25, 2001, and incorporated by reference herein.

⁴		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 033-88460, Accession No. 0001017062-02-002150 filed on December 19, 2002, and incorporated by reference herein.

⁵		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 033-88460, Accession No. 0001193125-03-099259 filed on December 24, 2003, and incorporated by reference herein.

⁶		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, as Exhibit 8(e), Accession No. 0000892569-05-000253 filed on April 19, 2005, and incorporated by reference herein.

⁷		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 033-88460, Accession No. 0000892569-06-000528 filed on April 18, 2006, and incorporated by reference herein.


⁸		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4, File No. 333-136597, Accession No. 0000892569-06-000999 filed on August 14, 2006, and incorporated by reference herein.

⁹		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-136597, Accession No. 0000892569-08-000624 filed on April 22, 2008, and incorporated by reference herein.

¹⁰		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-136597, Accession No. 0000892569-08-000961 filed on July 2, 2008, and incorporated by reference herein.

¹¹		Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-136597, Accession No. 0000892569-08-001559 filed on December 4, 2008, and incorporated by reference herein.


		Positions and Offices
Name and Address		with Pacific Life
James T. Morris		Director, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer
Khanh T. Tran		Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

Sharon A. Cheever		Director, Senior Vice President and General Counsel

Audrey L. Milfs		Director, Vice President and Secretary

Edward R. Byrd		Senior Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer


Brian D. Klemens		Vice President and Controller


Dewey P. Bushaw		Executive Vice President


Denis P. Kalscheur		Vice President and Treasurer


		SEPARATE ACCOUNT A
				(Registrant)

		By:		PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY


		By:

				James T. Morris*
				Director, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer


		By:		PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY (Depositor)


		By:

				James T. Morris*
				Director, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer


Signature	Title	Date

James T. Morris*	Director, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer	July 24, 2009
Khanh T. Tran*	Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer	July 24, 2009
Sharon A. Cheever*	Director, Senior Vice President and General Counsel	July 24, 2009
Audrey L. Milfs*	Director, Vice President and Secretary	July 24, 2009
Edward R. Byrd*	Senior Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer	July 24, 2009
Brian D. Klemens*	Vice President and Controller	July 24, 2009
Dewey P. Bushaw*	Executive Vice President	July 24, 2009


Denis P. Kalscheur*		Vice President and Treasurer		July 24, 2009

	(b)		the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made during that valuation period on the portfolio shares held by the Subaccount; plus or minus

	(c)		any per share charge or credit for any income taxes, other taxes, or amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes for which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments;

	(B)		is the net asset value per share of the portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the prior valuation period; and

	(C)		is a factor that we assess against the Subaccount’s net assets held by each Subaccount for the mortality and expense risk charge and the administrative fee during that valuation period.

	•		loan principal repaid; plus

	•		earned interest transferred from the Loan Account on that day.


	3%		5%
Years	Fixed		Variable
5		17.90		18.74
6		15.13		15.98
7		13.16		14.02
8		11.68		12.56
9		10.53		11.42
10		9.61		10.51
11		8.86		9.77
12		8.24		9.16
13		7.71		8.64
14		7.26		8.20
15		6.87		7.82
16		6.53		7.49
17		6.23		7.20
18		5.96		6.94
19		5.73		6.71
20		5.51		6.51
21		5.32		6.33
22		5.15		6.17
23		4.99		6.02
24		4.84		5.88
25		4.71		5.76
26		4.59		5.65
27		4.47		5.54
28		4.37		5.45
29		4.27		5.36
30		4.18		5.28

	1.		Pacific Life has been duly organized under the laws of the State of Nebraska and is a validly existing corporation.

	2.		Separate Account A is duly created and validly existing as a separate account, pursuant to the aforesaid provisions of California Law and maintained under the laws of the State of Nebraska.

	3.		The portion of the assets to be held in Separate Account A equal to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contracts and any other Contracts issued by Pacific Life that are supported by Separate Account A is not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business Pacific Life may conduct.

	4.		The Contracts have been duly authorized by Pacific Life and, when issued as contemplated by the Registration Statement, will constitute legal, validly issued and binding obligations of Pacific Life, except as limited by bankruptcy and insolvency laws affecting the right of creditors generally.

	•		Registration Statements under Separate Account A of Pacific Life Insurance Company (811-08946): 033-88458, 333-53040, 333-93059, 033-88460, 333-60833, 333-136597, 333-140881, 333-141135, 333-145822 and 333-148865.

	•		Registration Statement under Pacific Select Variable Annuity Separate Account of Pacific Life Insurance Company (811-05980): 033-32704.

	•		Registration Statement under Separate Account B of Pacific Life Insurance Company (811-07859): 333-14131.

	•		Registration Statement under Pacific Corinthian Variable Separate Account of Pacific Life Insurance Company (811-07082): 333-39209.


Re:		Registration Statement for Pacific Destinations Individual Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity (File Number to be Assigned) funded by Separate Account A (File Number 811-08946) of Pacific Life Insurance Company Request for Selective Review